Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Optimization

1,666 missions · 908 completed

Missions

Open758Completed908All1666
Linear OptimizationMachine LearningOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Strong Mixed-Integer Programming Formulations for Trained Neural Networks 2: Under Strict Activity Every Inequality of the Exponential Family (6b) Is Facet-DefiningResearch Paper

Motivation

Trained neural networks are increasingly embedded inside optimization models: to verify that a classifier is robust to small input perturbations, to optimize over a learned surrogate of an expensive system, or to choose decisions whose outcome is predicted by a network. When the network uses rectified linear units (ReLU), each neuron y=max⁡{0, w⋅x+b}y=\max\{0,\,w\cdot x+b\}y=max{0,w⋅x+b} is piecewise linear, and the whole network can be written exactly as a mixed-integer program (MIP) with one binary variable per neuron. How fast a branch-and-bound solver closes such a model depends on how tight the linear-programming relaxation of each neuron's formulation is.

Anderson, Huchette, Tjandraatmadja and Vielma (arXiv:1811.08359v2, the IPCO 2019 extended abstract) gave a formulation (6) of a single ReLU neuron over a box that uses only the original variables and one binary variable, and is ideal: its LP relaxation has integral extreme points (Proposition 1, p. 6). The price is an exponential family of inequalities (6b), one for every subset III of the support of www. The present mission formalizes their Proposition 2: each of these inequalities is facet-defining, so no member of the family can be dropped without weakening the relaxation. A longer journal version of the work, with different numbering, appeared later (arXiv:1811.01988); this mission follows the extended abstract.

Setting

Fix η∈N\eta\in\mathbb Nη∈N, a weight vector w∈Rηw\in\mathbb R^\etaw∈Rη, a bias b∈Rb\in\mathbb Rb∈R, and bounds L,U∈RηL,U\in\mathbb R^\etaL,U∈Rη with Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ for every iii (§1.3, p. 4). Write f(x)=w⋅x+bf(x)=w\cdot x+bf(x)=w⋅x+b and [L,U]={x:L≤x≤U}[L,U]=\{x : L\le x\le U\}[L,U]={x:L≤x≤U}. The sign-adjusted bounds are

L˘i={Liwi≥0Uiwi<0,U˘i={Uiwi≥0Liwi<0,\breve L_i=\begin{cases}L_i & w_i\ge 0\\ U_i & w_i<0\end{cases},\qquad \breve U_i=\begin{cases}U_i & w_i\ge 0\\ L_i & w_i<0\end{cases},L˘i​={Li​Ui​​wi​≥0wi​<0​,U˘i​={Ui​Li​​wi​≥0wi​<0​,

so that M+(f)=w⋅U˘+bM^+(f)=w\cdot\breve U+bM+(f)=w⋅U˘+b and M−(f)=w⋅L˘+bM^-(f)=w\cdot\breve L+bM−(f)=w⋅L˘+b are the maximum and minimum of fff over [L,U][L,U][L,U]. The support is supp⁡(w)={i:wi≠0}\operatorname{supp}(w)=\{i : w_i\neq 0\}supp(w)={i:wi​=0}. Strict activity means M−(f)<0<M+(f)M^-(f)<0<M^+(f)M−(f)<0<M+(f): the neuron is neither always off nor always on over the box. The paper assumes it throughout (§1.3).

Formulation (6) (p. 6) consists of the points (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z) with

y≥w⋅x+b,(6a)y≤∑i∈Iwi(xi−L˘i(1−z))+(b+∑i∉IwiU˘i)z∀I⊆supp⁡(w),(6b)(x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0×{0,1}.(6c)\begin{aligned} &y\ge w\cdot x+b, &&\text{(6a)}\\ &y\le\sum_{i\in I}w_i\bigl(x_i-\breve L_i(1-z)\bigr)+\Bigl(b+\sum_{i\notin I}w_i\breve U_i\Bigr)z\quad\forall I\subseteq\operatorname{supp}(w), &&\text{(6b)}\\ &(x,y,z)\in[L,U]\times\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times\{0,1\}. &&\text{(6c)} \end{aligned}​y≥w⋅x+b,y≤i∈I∑​wi​(xi​−L˘i​(1−z))+(b+i∈/I∑​wi​U˘i​)z∀I⊆supp(w),(x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0​×{0,1}.​​(6a)(6b)(6c)​

In Lean, form6 w b L U is this set, and relax6 w b L U is its LP relaxation (0≤z≤10\le z\le10≤z≤1 in place of z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}). The right-hand side of (6b) for the subset III is rhs6b w b L U I x z.

An inequality g≤0g\le0g≤0 is facet-defining for a set PPP when it holds on PPP, its face F=P∩{g=0}F=P\cap\{g=0\}F=P∩{g=0} is nonempty, and dim⁡F=dim⁡P−1\dim F=\dim P-1dimF=dimP−1, the dimension of a set being that of its affine hull. The paper uses this standard notion without defining it.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (p. 6)

Under L<UL<UL<U and strict activity, for every I⊆supp⁡(w)I\subseteq\operatorname{supp}(w)I⊆supp(w), the inequality (6b) for III is facet-defining for

P=conv⁡{(x,y,z):(x,y,z) satisfies (6a)–(6c)}.P=\operatorname{conv}\{(x,y,z) : (x,y,z)\text{ satisfies (6a)–(6c)}\}.P=conv{(x,y,z):(x,y,z) satisfies (6a)–(6c)}.

The page states the result as "Each inequality in (6b) is facet-defining", and adds right after the proof line: "We require the assumption of strict activity above, as introduced in Section 1.3."

Milestones (App. A.2, p. 15)

  1. For some ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, the η+2\eta+2η+2 points p0=(L˘,0,0)p^0=(\breve L,0,0)p0=(L˘,0,0), p1=(U˘,f(U˘),1)p^1=(\breve U,f(\breve U),1)p1=(U˘,f(U˘),1), p~i=(L˘+εσiei,0,0)\tilde p^i=(\breve L+\varepsilon\sigma_ie^i,0,0)p~​i=(L˘+εσi​ei,0,0) for i∉Ii\notin Ii∈/I, and p~i=(U˘−εσiei,f(U˘−εσiei),1)\tilde p^i=(\breve U-\varepsilon\sigma_ie^i,f(\breve U-\varepsilon\sigma_ie^i),1)p~​i=(U˘−εσi​ei,f(U˘−εσi​ei),1) for i∈Ii\in Ii∈I are feasible with respect to (6) and satisfy (6b) for III at equality; here σi=±1\sigma_i=\pm1σi​=±1 is the sign of wiw_iwi​ (with σi=1\sigma_i=1σi​=1 when wi=0w_i=0wi​=0).
  2. For every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 these η+2\eta+2η+2 points are affinely independent.

Significance

The result. Proposition 1 shows that (6) is ideal; Proposition 2 shows it cannot be made smaller: removing any single inequality (6b) produces a strictly weaker relaxation. Since the family has 2∣supp⁡(w)∣2^{|\operatorname{supp}(w)|}2∣supp(w)∣ members, this is what justifies the paper's practical recommendation to start from the big-MMM formulation and separate inequalities of (6b) on demand (Proposition 3, p. 7) rather than to search for a smaller ideal description in the same variables. The facet structure also gives the geometric picture the paper describes after Proposition 2: each facet is the convex combination of an (η−∣I∣)(\eta-|I|)(η−∣I∣)-dimensional face at z=0z=0z=0 and an ∣I∣|I|∣I∣-dimensional face at z=1z=1z=1.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper, in a half-page appendix; it has not been machine-checked. The formalization adds two things. First, the proof is written for w≥0w\ge0w≥0 "without loss of generality by appropriately interchanging +++ and −-−"; the Lean statements are for every sign pattern, including zero weights. Second, the appendix exhibits η+2\eta+2η+2 affinely independent points on the face, which bounds the face dimension from below; the statement that the face has dimension exactly one less than the polyhedron also needs the polyhedron to be full-dimensional and the face to lie in a proper hyperplane, steps the extended abstract leaves implicit and a complete proof must supply.

Difficulty

The arithmetic in each step is elementary. The work lies in the bookkeeping: choosing a single ε\varepsilonε that keeps every perturbed point inside the box and on the correct side of f=0f=0f=0 (this is exactly where strict activity enters), checking the perturbed points against all 2∣supp⁡(w)∣2^{|\operatorname{supp}(w)|}2∣supp(w)∣ inequalities of (6b) and not only the one for III, and turning a row-reduction argument on an (η+1)×(η+2)(\eta+1)\times(\eta+2)(η+1)×(η+2) matrix into a statement about AffineIndependent and finrank of a vectorSpan in Lean. The natural shortcut, proving only that η+2\eta+2η+2 affinely independent tight points exist, is not Proposition 2: it says nothing about the dimension of the polyhedron itself.

Formalization scope

Inputs are Fin η → ℝ (indices 0,…,η−10,\dots,\eta-10,…,η−1 for the paper's 1,…,η1,\dots,\eta1,…,η); a point (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z) is p : (Fin η → ℝ) × ℝ × ℝ with p.1 = x, p.2.1 = y, p.2.2 = z. M±(f)M^\pm(f)M±(f) are given by their closed forms w⋅U˘+bw\cdot\breve U+bw⋅U˘+b and w⋅L˘+bw\cdot\breve L+bw⋅L˘+b. In (6b), "i∉Ii\notin Ii∈/I" ranges over all indices outside III, zero weights included; III ranges over subsets of supp⁡(w)\operatorname{supp}(w)supp(w), as on the page.

Every goal and milestone keeps the standing assumptions of §1.3, Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ for all iii and strict activity, except the affine-independence milestone, which holds without them and is stated without them (a stronger statement). No other hypothesis is added. Strict activity excludes η=0\eta=0η=0, so no nonemptiness assumption on the index set is needed.

IsFacetDefining P g is the standard notion: validity, a nonempty face, and dim⁡F+1=dim⁡P\dim F+1=\dim PdimF+1=dimP with dimensions the finrank of the vectorSpan. The equation is written with +1+1+1 on the left so that no natural-number subtraction can make the empty set or a point a facet. The polyhedron is the convex hull of the points of (6), not the set form6 itself (which is not convex, since z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}); by Proposition 1 it equals the LP relaxation relax6, but the statement does not depend on that.

The shared objects of this paper (the ReLU graph, L˘\breve LL˘, U˘\breve UU˘, M±M^\pmM±, support, strict activity, formulation (6), ideality) come from the shared definitions module ReluMIP.Ideal.Setting, common to the companion mission on Proposition 1; this mission's own definitions module adds form6, IsFacetDefining, the sign inward, and the indexed family facetPts of the η+2\eta+2η+2 points. The facet notion and the affine-independence argument are reusable for other facet proofs of polyhedra in product spaces. Proofs of the milestones, of the goal, and of the full-dimensionality step are all welcome.

Selected references

  • R. Anderson, J. Huchette, C. Tjandraatmadja, J. P. Vielma, Strong mixed-integer programming formulations for trained neural networks, IPCO 2019, LNCS 11480, pp. 27–42; preprint arXiv:1811.08359v2, 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1811.08359v2
  • R. Anderson, J. Huchette, W. Ma, C. Tjandraatmadja, J. P. Vielma, Strong mixed-integer programming formulations for trained neural networks, Mathematical Programming 183 (2020), 3–39. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-020-01474-5
  • G. L. Nemhauser, L. A. Wolsey, Integer and Combinatorial Optimization, Wiley, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781118627372
  • M. Conforti, G. Cornuéjols, G. Zambelli, Integer Programming, Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-11008-0
  • J. P. Vielma, Mixed integer linear programming formulation techniques, SIAM Review 57 (2015), 3–57. https://doi.org/10.1137/130915303
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Supplier Centrality and Auditing Priority in Socially Responsible Supply Chains II: A Stable Joint-Auditing Coalition Audits the Common Supplier and Shares Costs FairlyResearch Paper

Motivation

Brands that sell consumer goods are held responsible by the public for the labour and safety practices of their suppliers. After the 2013 Rana Plaza collapse in Bangladesh, about 200 clothing brands and retailers signed the Accord on Fire and Building Safety and inspect roughly 1,600 factories jointly; pharmaceutical companies such as Pfizer and GSK audit their suppliers jointly through the Pharmaceutical Supply Chain Initiative (both examples from the paper, pp. 4 and 14). Two features of such supply bases matter for auditing. Competing brands often share a common supplier, so a scandal at that supplier hurts both of them. And brands compete downstream, so a scandal that hurts only a rival can help a brand.

Chen, Qi and Dawande (MSOM 2020; accepted manuscript SSRN 2889889) model two competing buyers with one common and two independent suppliers. Their Proposition 2 shows that, when each buyer audits on his own, competition drives the buyers away from the common supplier: in every equilibrium it is left unaudited. This mission formalizes their Proposition 3. It shows that a coalition that audits jointly, and splits the cost by a Shapley-value rule, does audit the common supplier and is stable. A companion mission (Supplier Centrality … I) covers Proposition 2.

Setting

Two buyers B1,B2B_1, B_2B1​,B2​ source from three suppliers: BiB_iBi​ from its independent supplier SiS_iSi​, and both from the common supplier ScS_cSc​. Each supplier is compliant with probability e∈(0,1)e\in(0,1)e∈(0,1). A non-compliant supplier that passes an audit of effort x∈[0,1]x\in[0,1]x∈[0,1] (probability 1−x1-x1−x) is exposed in public with probability r∈(0,1]r\in(0,1]r∈(0,1]. An independent supplier audited with effort xxx therefore causes damage with probability λI(x)=r(1−e)(1−x)\lambda_I(x)=r(1-e)(1-x)λI​(x)=r(1−e)(1−x). The three suppliers offend independently.

If buyer BiB_iBi​ has ni∈{0,1,2}n_i\in\{0,1,2\}ni​∈{0,1,2} exposed suppliers, its demand intercept falls from α\alphaα to α−dM\alpha-d_Mα−dM​ (by dM>0d_M>0dM​>0 once, however many offend). Each exposed supplier also raises its unit input cost from www to w^≥w\hat w\ge ww^≥w. The buyers then play a Cournot game with differentiated products (substitution β∈(0,1]\beta\in(0,1]β∈(0,1]). Buyer B1B_1B1​'s equilibrium profit is π1b(n1,n2)=(q1∗)2\pi^b_1(n_1,n_2)=(q^*_1)^2π1b​(n1​,n2​)=(q1∗​)2, where

q1∗=2(A1−c1)−β(A2−c2)4−β2,Ai=α−dM1{ni≥1},ci=(2−ni)w+niw^.q^*_1=\frac{2(A_1-c_1)-\beta(A_2-c_2)}{4-\beta^2},\qquad A_i=\alpha-d_M\mathbf 1\{n_i\ge1\},\quad c_i=(2-n_i)w+n_i\hat w.q1∗​=4−β22(A1​−c1​)−β(A2​−c2​)​,Ai​=α−dM​1{ni​≥1},ci​=(2−ni​)w+ni​w^.

The aggregate ex post profit is πb(i dM,j dM)=π1b(i,j)+π2b(i,j)\pi^b(i\,d_M,j\,d_M)=\pi^b_1(i,j)+\pi^b_2(i,j)πb(idM​,jdM​)=π1b​(i,j)+π2b​(i,j). Auditing a supplier with effort xxx costs K1{x>0}+a2x2K\mathbf 1\{x>0\}+\tfrac a2x^2K1{x>0}+2a​x2.

Unilateral auditing. Each buyer audits at most one of his two suppliers. Πib\Pi^b_iΠib​ is buyer BiB_iBi​'s expected profit net of his own audit costs. An equilibrium is a pair of mutual best responses in which, by the paper's tie-breaking rule, a buyer who audits strictly prefers it to not auditing. The effort e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ of eq. (2) is a buyer's optimal effort on his own supplier when the rival does not audit.

Joint auditing. The coalition chooses efforts x=(ec1,ecc,ec2)∈[0,1]3x=(e_{c1},e_{cc},e_{c2})\in[0,1]^3x=(ec1​,ecc​,ec2​)∈[0,1]3 on S1,Sc,S2S_1,S_c,S_2S1​,Sc​,S2​, auditing at most two suppliers, and pays each audited supplier's cost once. The buyers still compete downstream. With Rib(x)R^b_i(x)Rib​(x) the buyers' expected profits excluding audit costs, the coalition's profit is

Πb(x)=R1b(x)+R2b(x)−∑j∈{1,c,2}[K1{ecj>0}+a2ecj2].\Pi^b(x)=R^b_1(x)+R^b_2(x)-\sum_{j\in\{1,c,2\}}\Big[K\mathbf 1\{e_{cj}>0\}+\tfrac a2e_{cj}^2\Big].Πb(x)=R1b​(x)+R2b​(x)−j∈{1,c,2}∑​[K1{ecj​>0}+2a​ecj2​].

The difference of the buyers' profits is ΔΠ=R1b−R2b\Delta\Pi=R^b_1-R^b_2ΔΠ=R1b​−R2b​. The cost shares are Γ1,2=12[total cost±ΔΠ]\Gamma_{1,2}=\tfrac12[\text{total cost}\pm\Delta\Pi]Γ1,2​=21​[total cost±ΔΠ] (eq. (3)). The analysis assumes the scenario

πb(0,0)≥πb(dM,0)≥πb(dM,dM)≥πb(2dM,dM)≥πb(2dM,2dM).\pi^b(0,0)\ge\pi^b(d_M,0)\ge\pi^b(d_M,d_M)\ge\pi^b(2d_M,d_M)\ge\pi^b(2d_M,2d_M).πb(0,0)≥πb(dM​,0)≥πb(dM​,dM​)≥πb(2dM​,dM​)≥πb(2dM​,2dM​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3

There are thresholds KcL≤KcHK^L_c\le K^H_cKcL​≤KcH​ such that, for every K≥0K\ge0K≥0, an optimal joint plan

{audits S1 and Sc, ΔΠ>0,K<KcL,audits only Sc, ΔΠ=0,KcL≤K<KcH,audits nothing,K≥KcH.\begin{cases}\text{audits } S_1 \text{ and } S_c,\ \Delta\Pi>0, & K<K^L_c,\\ \text{audits only } S_c,\ \Delta\Pi=0, & K^L_c\le K<K^H_c,\\ \text{audits nothing}, & K\ge K^H_c.\end{cases}⎩⎨⎧​audits S1​ and Sc​, ΔΠ>0,audits only Sc​, ΔΠ=0,audits nothing,​K<KcL​,KcL​≤K<KcH​,K≥KcH​.​

The coalition is also stable. At an optimal plan its aggregate profit is at least the buyers' aggregate profit in any unilateral equilibrium. After paying Γi\Gamma_iΓi​, each buyer earns at least his profit in a symmetric unilateral equilibrium.

Milestones

The coalition's profit as a sum of unilateral profits (proof of Lemma OA9). Lemma OA9: ScS_cSc​ beats one independent supplier, and beats no audit for K<K^K<\hat KK<K^. Lemma OA10: ScS_cSc​ with S1S_1S1​ beats S1S_1S1​ with S2S_2S2​. Lemma OA11: S1S_1S1​ with ScS_cSc​ beats ScS_cSc​ alone for K<K~K<\tilde KK<K~. The fair shares (3). The case analysis with KcL=min⁡{K^+K~2,K~}K^L_c=\min\{\frac{\hat K+\tilde K}2,\tilde K\}KcL​=min{2K^+K~​,K~} and KcH=max⁡{K^+K~2,K^}K^H_c=\max\{\frac{\hat K+\tilde K}2,\hat K\}KcH​=max{2K^+K~​,K^}. Stability.

Significance

The result separates two effects of downstream competition on responsible sourcing. Under unilateral auditing, a buyer gains nothing private from auditing the shared supplier: the reduction in risk accrues equally to his rival. The joint coalition removes this free-riding. The common supplier is audited whenever anything is, and the Shapley-type split (3) charges the buyer who also has his own supplier audited for the competitive advantage this gives him (Γ1>Γ2\Gamma_1>\Gamma_2Γ1​>Γ2​ exactly when ΔΠ>0\Delta\Pi>0ΔΠ>0). The paper's welfare comparison (Proposition 4) builds on this proposition and on Proposition 2.

The proof in the e-companion argues through four comparisons of candidate plans and short cost-sharing algebra. None of it is machine-checked. A formal proof fixes the model (in particular which costs the coalition pays and what "at most two suppliers" excludes) and checks each comparison. In one place it also corrects the printed claim: the per-firm stability argument is given only for the symmetric unilateral equilibrium, and it does not extend to the asymmetric one (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

All objects are explicit polynomials in the efforts. The difficulty is in the comparisons. Lemmas OA9 and OA10 compare different audit plans through the scenario ordering of aggregate ex post profits, an assumption on the stage-2 closed form that is not implied by the standing conditions. The obvious attempt, comparing first-order conditions, fails because the coalition's profit is discontinuous at zero effort (the fixed cost) and the feasible set is not convex: "at most two of three" is a union of faces of the cube. The thresholds K^\hat KK^, K~\tilde KK~ are differences of maxima, so the case analysis has to handle ties and the boundary K=KcHK=K^H_cK=KcH​ with weak inequalities. Stability needs the unilateral equilibria of Proposition 2, so the full goal reaches into the companion mission's game.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Params holds α,β,w,w^,dM,e,r,a\alpha,\beta,w,\hat w,d_M,e,r,aα,β,w,w^,dM​,e,r,a with β∈[0,1]\beta\in[0,1]β∈[0,1], w≤w^w\le\hat ww≤w^, dM>0d_M>0dM​>0, e∈(0,1)e\in(0,1)e∈(0,1), r∈(0,1]r\in(0,1]r∈(0,1], a>0a>0a>0 and the three positivity conditions of p. 8. Every statement adds β>0\beta>0β>0 (Sec. 4.3 continues the competing case) and the p. 13 scenario as five inequalities between piAgg values. Their arguments count exposed suppliers: πb(2dM,dM)\pi^b(2d_M,d_M)πb(2dM​,dM​) is a label, not a damage of 2dM2d_M2dM​.
  • Expected profits are 8-outcome expectations of the closed-form stage-2 profit. The coalition's profit charges each audited supplier once, and the common supplier's damage probability under a joint audit is r(1−e)(1−ecc)r(1-e)(1-e_{cc})r(1−e)(1−ecc​).
  • Thresholds K^,K~\hat K,\tilde KK^,K~ are the maxima at K=0K=0K=0 written as sSup over [0,1][0,1][0,1] and [0,1]2[0,1]^2[0,1]2. At K=0K=0K=0 the profit is a polynomial, so these suprema are attained.
  • "Yields the highest aggregate profit" is read as "some maximizer over the feasible plans has this pattern"; uniqueness is not claimed. ΔΠ\Delta\PiΔΠ is evaluated at that maximizer (its mirror image, which audits S2S_2S2​, has ΔΠ<0\Delta\Pi<0ΔΠ<0).
  • Cost shares use the total cost of the plan. For plans with ec2=0e_{c2}=0ec2​=0 they are the printed formulas (3).
  • Unilateral benchmark. The equilibrium includes the tie-breaking rule of p. 10, and the interior-effort assumption of p. 10 is encoded as e^I<1\hat e_I<1e^I​<1, with e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ given by eq. (2).
  • Stability, corrected. Condition (b) of Sec. 4.3 (each firm earns more) is stated against symmetric unilateral equilibria only, the case the paper's proof treats. Against the asymmetric equilibrium, where one buyer audits with e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ and the other audits nothing, it fails. Take α=10\alpha=10α=10, β=1\beta=1β=1, w=1w=1w=1, w^=3\hat w=3w^=3, dM=12d_M=\tfrac12dM​=21​, e=110e=\tfrac1{10}e=101​, r=1r=1r=1, a=50a=50a=50, K=0.2K=0.2K=0.2: the coalition optimally audits nothing, yet the auditing buyer earns more unilaterally than half of the coalition's profit. Condition (a) is stated against every equilibrium. "Higher" is stated as ≥\ge≥.
  • The goal's thresholds are existential and come before ∀K\forall K∀K. Choosing KcL=KcHK^L_c=K^H_cKcL​=KcH​ does not trivialize it, because the three cases must cover every K≥0K\ge0K≥0. The milestone on part (2) fixes the thresholds explicitly.
  • The source is the authors' SSRN accepted manuscript. Main-text page numbers equal PDF pages, and e-companion page eckkk is PDF page 28+k28+k28+k.

Contributions welcome: proofs of Lemmas OA9–OA11, which are self-contained polynomial inequalities; existence of maximizers on the non-convex feasible set (upper semicontinuity); and the link to the unilateral equilibria needed for stability.

Selected references

  • F. Chen, A. Qi, M. Dawande, Supplier Centrality and Auditing Priority in Socially-Responsible Supply Chains, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2020; accepted manuscript, SSRN 2889889. https://ssrn.com/abstract=2889889
  • E. L. Plambeck, T. A. Taylor, Supplier evasion of a buyer's audit: Implications for motivating supplier social and environmental responsibility, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 18(2):184–197, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2015.0550
  • N. Singh, X. Vives, Price and quantity competition in a differentiated duopoly, RAND Journal of Economics 15(4):546–554, 1984. https://doi.org/10.2307/2555525
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

A Block Successive Upper-Bound Minimization Method of Multipliers for Linearly Constrained Convex Optimization 2: Randomized BSUM-M Converges to Primal-Dual Optimal Solutions Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

Many large convex problems in signal processing, networking and statistics have a separable objective coupled by linear constraints: KKK blocks of variables, each with its own nonsmooth regularizer and its own feasible set, tied together by ∑kEkxk=q\sum_k E_kx_k=q∑k​Ek​xk​=q. The alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) is the standard tool for such problems when K=2K=2K=2. For K≥3K\ge3K≥3 the direct extension of ADMM can diverge, as shown by Chen, He, Ye and Yuan (2016), and convergence guarantees for multi-block variants typically require strong convexity or extra correction steps.

Hong, Chang, Wang, Razaviyayn, Ma and Luo propose the block successive upper-bound minimization method of multipliers (BSUM-M), which updates each primal block by minimizing a local upper bound of the augmented Lagrangian, followed by a dual gradient step, and prove that it converges for any number of blocks without strong convexity of the objective. They also analyse a randomized version, RBSUM-M, in which each iteration updates a single randomly chosen block, primal or dual. Randomized block selection matters when data or computation are distributed and not every block is available at every step. This mission formalizes the randomized half of their main theorem; the cyclic half is a separate mission.

Setting

Let x=(x1,…,xK)x=(x_1,\dots,x_K)x=(x1​,…,xK​) with xk∈Rnkx_k\in\mathbb R^{n_k}xk​∈Rnk​, and consider

min⁡x f(x)=g(x)+∑k=1Khk(xk)s.t.Ex=∑k=1KEkxk=q,xk∈Xk.(1.1)\min_x\ f(x)=g(x)+\sum_{k=1}^K h_k(x_k)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad Ex=\sum_{k=1}^K E_kx_k=q,\quad x_k\in X_k. \tag{1.1}xmin​ f(x)=g(x)+k=1∑K​hk​(xk​)s.t.Ex=k=1∑K​Ek​xk​=q,xk​∈Xk​.(1.1)

The standing assumptions (Assumption A) are: g(x)=ℓ(Ax)+⟨x,b⟩g(x)=\ell(Ax)+\langle x,b\rangleg(x)=ℓ(Ax)+⟨x,b⟩ with ℓ\ellℓ strictly convex and continuously differentiable; hk(xk)=λk∥xk∥1+∑JwJ∥xk,J∥2h_k(x_k)=\lambda_k\|x_k\|_1+\sum_J w_J\|x_{k,J}\|_2hk​(xk​)=λk​∥xk​∥1​+∑J​wJ​∥xk,J​∥2​ with nonnegative weights; each Xk={xk∣Ckxk≤ck}X_k=\{x_k\mid C_kx_k\le c_k\}Xk​={xk​∣Ck​xk​≤ck​} is a compact polyhedron; the problem is feasible and its primal and dual optimal values are attained.

For ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 the augmented Lagrangian and augmented dual function are

L(x;y)=f(x)+⟨y,q−Ex⟩+ρ2∥q−Ex∥2,d(y)=min⁡x∈XL(x;y),L(x;y)=f(x)+\langle y,q-Ex\rangle+\frac\rho2\|q-Ex\|^2,\qquad d(y)=\min_{x\in X}L(x;y),L(x;y)=f(x)+⟨y,q−Ex⟩+2ρ​∥q−Ex∥2,d(y)=x∈Xmin​L(x;y),

and X(y)X(y)X(y) is the set of minimizers of L(⋅;y)L(\cdot;y)L(⋅;y) over X=∏kXkX=\prod_kX_kX=∏k​Xk​. The method works with approximation functions uk(vk;x)u_k(v_k;x)uk​(vk​;x) (Assumption B): uk(⋅;x)u_k(\cdot;x)uk​(⋅;x) majorizes g+ρ2∥E⋅−q∥2g+\frac\rho2\|E\cdot-q\|^2g+2ρ​∥E⋅−q∥2 in block kkk, touches it with matching gradient at xkx_kxk​, is strongly convex with modulus γk\gamma_kγk​ and has an LkL_kLk​-Lipschitz gradient.

RBSUM-M. Fix probabilities p0,…,pK>0p_0,\dots,p_K>0p0​,…,pK​>0 summing to 1. At iteration t≥1t\ge1t≥1 draw kkk with probability pkp_kpk​. If k=0k=0k=0, take a dual step yt+1=yt+αt(q−Ext)y^{t+1}=y^t+\alpha^t(q-Ex^t)yt+1=yt+αt(q−Ext); otherwise replace block kkk by

xkt+1=arg⁡min⁡xk∈Xk uk(xk;xt)−⟨yt,Ekxk⟩+hk(xk),x_k^{t+1}=\arg\min_{x_k\in X_k}\ u_k(x_k;x^t)-\langle y^t,E_kx_k\rangle+h_k(x_k),xkt+1​=argxk​∈Xk​min​ uk​(xk​;xt)−⟨yt,Ek​xk​⟩+hk​(xk​),

leaving the other blocks and yyy unchanged. The analysis uses the block steps x^kt+1\hat x_k^{t+1}x^kt+1​ (the minimizer above, computed for every kkk), the dual step y^t+1=yt+αt(q−Ext)\hat y^{t+1}=y^t+\alpha^t(q-Ex^t)y^​t+1=yt+αt(q−Ext), the gaps Δdt=d∗−d(yt)\Delta_d^t=d^*-d(y^t)Δdt​=d∗−d(yt), Δpt=L(xt;yt)−d(yt)\Delta_p^t=L(x^t;y^t)-d(y^t)Δpt​=L(xt;yt)−d(yt), and the proximal gradient ∇~xL(x;y)=x−prox⁡h+ιX(x−∇x(L(x;y)−h(x)))\tilde\nabla_xL(x;y)=x-\operatorname{prox}_{h+\iota_X}\big(x-\nabla_x(L(x;y)-h(x))\big)∇~x​L(x;y)=x−proxh+ιX​​(x−∇x​(L(x;y)−h(x))). The error bound with constant τ\tauτ is dist⁡(x,X(y))≤τ∥∇~xL(x;y)∥\operatorname{dist}(x,X(y))\le\tau\|\tilde\nabla_xL(x;y)\|dist(x,X(y))≤τ∥∇~x​L(x;y)∥ for all yyy and x∈Xx\in Xx∈X.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1, part 2

Under Assumptions A and B and the error bound, if the stepsizes are either constant and sufficiently small, or satisfy ∑tαt=∞\sum_t\alpha^t=\infty∑t​αt=∞, αt→0\alpha^t\to0αt→0, then with probability 1

∥Ext−q∥→0,∥xt−xt+1∥→0,∥xt−xˉt∥→0,\|Ex^t-q\|\to0,\qquad\|x^t-x^{t+1}\|\to0,\qquad\|x^t-\bar x^t\|\to0,∥Ext−q∥→0,∥xt−xt+1∥→0,∥xt−xˉt∥→0,

where xˉt\bar x^txˉt is the point of X(y^t)X(\hat y^t)X(y^​t) nearest to xtx^txt, and every limit point of (xt,yt)(x^t,y^t)(xt,yt) is a primal and dual optimal pair. The threshold for "sufficiently small" is existential and depends only on the problem data, the uku_kuk​, the error-bound constant and ppp.

Milestones

In the order of the paper: Lemma 2.1 (differentiability of ddd, ∇d(y)=q−Ex(y)\nabla d(y)=q-Ex(y)∇d(y)=q−Ex(y), the 1/ρ1/\rho1/ρ-Lipschitz bound); Lemma 2.3(2) (expected decrease of LLL); Lemma 2.4(2) (proximal gradient bounded by the block and dual steps); Lemmas 2.5(2) and 2.6(2) (expected change of the dual and primal gaps); and from the proof of Theorem 2.1, (2.24)–(2.25) (expected change of Δp+Δd\Delta_p+\Delta_dΔp​+Δd​), (2.28) (constraint violation), (2.29) (the descent estimate with explicit coefficients) and (2.40) (one-step change of ∥Exˉt−q∥\|E\bar x^t-q\|∥Exˉt−q∥).

Significance

The result shows that a randomized, single-block-per-iteration primal-dual method converges almost surely to primal-dual optimal solutions of a multi-block linearly constrained problem, under assumptions that allow a rank-deficient AAA, nonsmooth group-sparse regularizers, and inexact (majorized) block subproblems. The potential function Δp+Δd\Delta_p+\Delta_dΔp​+Δd​ and the way the error bound converts it into a supermartingale estimate are reused in later analyses of multi-block and randomized ADMM-type methods.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. Formalizing it produces a checked convergence proof for a randomized augmented-Lagrangian method, a reusable formal treatment of the augmented dual function of a convex program with compact polyhedral constraints, and a precise record of the conventions under which the published statements hold (see the scope section).

Difficulty

The obvious route is to show that L(xt;yt)L(x^t;y^t)L(xt;yt) decreases. It does not: a dual step increases LLL by αt∥q−Ext∥2\alpha^t\|q-Ex^t\|^2αt∥q−Ext∥2, and without strong convexity there is no direct control of the distance to the solution set. The argument has to combine the primal and dual gaps into one potential, bound the residual term ∥Ext−Exˉt+1∥\|Ex^t-E\bar x^{t+1}\|∥Ext−Exˉt+1∥ through an error bound that holds without strong convexity, and then pass from a conditional-expectation inequality to almost-sure convergence. Under diminishing stepsizes the supermartingale argument only yields lim inf⁡∥Exˉt−q∥=0\liminf\|E\bar x^t-q\|=0liminf∥Exˉt−q∥=0, and upgrading this to a limit needs a separate pathwise argument on how fast ∇d(y^t)\nabla d(\hat y^t)∇d(y^​t) can move.

Formalization scope

Blocks are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin (n k)) and the full vector lives in PiLp 2, so norms are Euclidean. ℓ\ellℓ is real-valued on all of Rp\mathbb R^pRp. The augmented dual function is d(y)=min⁡x∈XL(x;y)d(y)=\min_{x\in X}L(x;y)d(y)=minx∈X​L(x;y) (the page's (1.9) prints an unconstrained minimum of ggg plus penalty; the constrained reading is the one Lemma 2.1 and (2.19) use). The prox in the proximal gradient includes the constraint set XXX, which is what the proof of Lemma 2.4 needs; the error bound of Lemma 2.2 is a hypothesis of the goal, in its global form on XXX, and is not derived. Lemma 2.2 itself is not part of the mission.

Conditional expectations given zt=(xt,yt)z^t=(x^t,y^t)zt=(xt,yt) are written as the explicit average p0F(x,y^)+∑kpkF((x^k,x−k),y)p_0F(x,\hat y)+\sum_kp_kF((\hat x_k,x_{-k}),y)p0​F(x,y^​)+∑k​pk​F((x^k​,x−k​),y) over the random index, at every state; this is E[F(zt+1)∣zt]\mathbb E[F(z^{t+1})\mid z^t]E[F(zt+1)∣zt] because the index drawn at iteration ttt is independent of ztz^tzt. The goal is stated on an arbitrary probability space carrying mutually independent indices with law ppp, for every run from a deterministic start x1∈Xx^1\in Xx1∈X, y1y^1y1. Iterations are indexed from t=1t=1t=1 as on the page.

Two printed statements are corrected and labelled in their items: Lemma 2.1 asserts AxAxAx (not each AkxkA_kx_kAk​xk​) constant over X(y)X(y)X(y), and Lemma 2.6(2) uses αt\alpha^tαt where the page prints αr\alpha^rαr. Statements are not trivialized: the setting is satisfiable (for instance K=1K=1K=1, g≡0g\equiv0g≡0, h=0h=0h=0, E=0E=0E=0, X=[−1,1]X=[-1,1]X=[−1,1], u(v;x)=(v−x1)2/2u(v;x)=(v-x_1)^2/2u(v;x)=(v−x1​)2/2), the stepsize threshold precedes the probability space and the run, and the solution sets entering distances are nonempty under Assumption A. A formalization in which the error bound or the gap bounds are assumed in a form that already contains the conclusion would not count.

A complete development needs: Danskin-type differentiability of ddd and the 1/ρ1/\rho1/ρ-smoothness of the augmented dual; first-order optimality and nonexpansiveness of the prox of h+ιXh+\iota_Xh+ιX​; and the Robbins–Siegmund almost-supermartingale convergence theorem in Mathlib's conditional expectation framework, together with a bridge from the explicit index average to condExp. The last two are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions to any of the milestones, or to these general lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Hong, T.-H. Chang, X. Wang, M. Razaviyayn, S. Ma, Z.-Q. Luo, A Block Successive Upper Bound Minimization Method of Multipliers for Linearly Constrained Convex Optimization, arXiv:1401.7079v1, 2014; Mathematics of Operations Research 45(3), 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1401.7079, https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.2019.1010
  • M. Hong, Z.-Q. Luo, On the linear convergence of the alternating direction method of multipliers, Mathematical Programming 162, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-1034-2
  • C. Chen, B. He, Y. Ye, X. Yuan, The direct extension of ADMM for multi-block convex minimization problems is not necessarily convergent, Mathematical Programming 155, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-014-0826-5
  • H. Robbins, D. Siegmund, A convergence theorem for non negative almost supermartingales and some applications, in Optimizing Methods in Statistics, Academic Press, 1971. https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-604550-5.50015-8
  • M. Razaviyayn, M. Hong, Z.-Q. Luo, A unified convergence analysis of block successive minimization methods for nonsmooth optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 23(2), 2013. https://doi.org/10.1137/120891009

Theorem numbers, equation numbers and page numbers in this mission refer to arXiv:1401.7079v1 (printed page = PDF page − 1); the journal version renumbers them.

12 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningOptimal Transport·Captain: mikedeng1

Computational Optimal Transport XII: The Entropic Barycenter Scalings Are (e^{f_s/ε}, e^{g_s/ε}) for the Solutions of a Dual Program with Σ_s λ_s f_s = 0Textbook

Why barycenters of histograms matter

A barycenter summarizes several objects by minimizing a weighted sum of distances to them. For probability histograms, ordinary coordinatewise averages depend strongly on how the bins are labeled. Optimal transport instead lets mass move between bins and charges for those moves through a cost matrix. The resulting Wasserstein barycenter can reflect the geometry of the bins: nearby bins can exchange mass at a lower cost than distant ones. Peyré and Cuturi use this construction in their treatment of variational transport problems, including shape interpolation and the representation of a measure as a barycenter of other measures. The finite histogram problem in this mission is the entropically regularized version developed in §9.2 of their textbook.

The computational question is how to connect three ways of describing the same solution: a histogram that is the barycenter, transport matrices coupling it to the inputs, and vectors of dual potentials. Proposition 9.1 on p. 530 identifies the dual potentials behind the scaling factors of the optimal transport matrices. This is the second proposition numbered 9.1 in the chapter; the one on p. 519 concerns derivatives with respect to histograms.

Finite histogram setting

There are SSS input histograms. Source sss has nsn_sns​ bins and a probability vector bsb_sbs​, while the barycenter has nnn bins. The real matrix Cs∈Rn×nsC_s\in\mathbb R^{n\times n_s}Cs​∈Rn×ns​ gives the cost of transporting a unit of mass from barycenter bin iii to input bin jjj. A weight vector λ∈ΣS\lambda\in\Sigma_Sλ∈ΣS​ has nonnegative entries summing to one; Σk\Sigma_kΣk​ denotes the probability simplex on kkk bins. The unregularized barycenter problem (9.10) minimizes ∑sλsLCs(a,bs)\sum_s\lambda_s L_{C_s}(a,b_s)∑s​λs​LCs​​(a,bs​) over a∈Σna\in\Sigma_na∈Σn​, where LCsL_{C_s}LCs​​ is the minimum transport cost with marginals aaa and bsb_sbs​.

For a regularization parameter ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, the entropic transport cost LCsε(a,bs)L^\varepsilon_{C_s}(a,b_s)LCs​ε​(a,bs​) minimizes ⟨Cs,Ps⟩−εH(Ps)\langle C_s,P_s\rangle-\varepsilon H(P_s)⟨Cs​,Ps​⟩−εH(Ps​) over nonnegative coupling matrices PsP_sPs​ with row marginal aaa and column marginal bsb_sbs​. Here ⟨Cs,Ps⟩=∑i,jCs,ijPs,ij\langle C_s,P_s\rangle=\sum_{i,j}C_{s,ij}P_{s,ij}⟨Cs​,Ps​⟩=∑i,j​Cs,ij​Ps,ij​ and H(Ps)=∑i,j(−Ps,ijlog⁡Ps,ij+Ps,ij)H(P_s)=\sum_{i,j}(-P_{s,ij}\log P_{s,ij}+P_{s,ij})H(Ps​)=∑i,j​(−Ps,ij​logPs,ij​+Ps,ij​), with 0log⁡0=00\log0=00log0=0. The Gibbs kernel is Ks,ij=e−Cs,ij/εK_{s,ij}=e^{-C_{s,ij}/\varepsilon}Ks,ij​=e−Cs,ij​/ε.

The book also writes the regularized barycenter as a weighted KL projection. Its variables are the matrices (Ps)s(P_s)_s(Ps​)s​; each matrix has column marginal bsb_sbs​, and every matrix has the same row marginal. That shared row marginal is aaa, so the optimization can be expressed without carrying aaa as a separate variable. The generalized matrix divergence is KL(Ps∣Ks)=∑i,j[Ps,ijlog⁡(Ps,ij/Ks,ij)−Ps,ij+Ks,ij]\mathrm{KL}(P_s\mid K_s)=\sum_{i,j}[P_{s,ij}\log(P_{s,ij}/K_{s,ij})-P_{s,ij}+K_{s,ij}]KL(Ps​∣Ks​)=∑i,j​[Ps,ij​log(Ps,ij​/Ks,ij​)−Ps,ij​+Ks,ij​], using the continuous value at Ps,ij=0P_{s,ij}=0Ps,ij​=0. See (9.15)–(9.17) in Peyré and Cuturi.

Formalization targets

The goal is Proposition 9.1 on p. 530. The dual variables are row potentials fs∈Rnf_s\in\mathbb R^nfs​∈Rn and column potentials gs∈Rnsg_s\in\mathbb R^{n_s}gs​∈Rns​. They maximize

∑sλs[⟨gs,bs⟩−ε∑i,jefs,i/εKs,ijegs,j/ε]subject to∑sλsfs=0.\sum_s\lambda_s\left[\langle g_s,b_s\rangle-\varepsilon\sum_{i,j}e^{f_{s,i}/\varepsilon}K_{s,ij}e^{g_{s,j}/\varepsilon}\right] \quad\text{subject to}\quad \sum_s\lambda_s f_s=0.s∑​λs​[⟨gs​,bs​⟩−εi,j∑​efs,i​/εKs,ij​egs,j​/ε]subject tos∑​λs​fs​=0.

The theorem asserts that the primal and dual optima are attained, that every optimal primal family and every optimal dual family satisfy

Ps,ij=efs,i/εKs,ijegs,j/ε,P_{s,ij}=e^{f_{s,i}/\varepsilon}K_{s,ij}e^{g_{s,j}/\varepsilon},Ps,ij​=efs,i​/εKs,ij​egs,j​/ε,

and that the dual maximum is the minimum value of the entropic barycenter objective (9.15). The milestone targets are the scalar and matrix versions of the KL conjugate (9.22), followed by the closed form maximizer of one gsg_sgs​ block, corresponding to the update (9.18). These statements retain the source's finite matrix setting and are listed in the order in which their concepts enter the dual formulation.

What the result supplies

The scaling formula turns the optimal couplings into a product of a row factor, a fixed positive kernel, and a column factor. It identifies those factors with exponentials of dual potentials and gives a constrained maximization problem whose value is the entropic barycenter cost. Thus a solver can reason about the couplings, the barycenter marginal, or the potentials while referring to one theorem that connects them. The book uses the same variables to describe the iterative scaling updates on pp. 529–531 and later illustrates barycenters of shapes and surface measures; those applications depend on interpreting the matrix factors correctly. Peyré and Cuturi give the mathematical proposition and its argument. A complete Lean proof of the proposition and its supporting KL identities is the work this mission calls for; the statements here are draft targets rather than machine-checked solutions.

Where the difficulty lies

The potential program is a constrained optimization problem, while the transport problem constrains nonnegative matrices by two kinds of marginals. Equality of their optimum values must preserve the normalization constants in generalized KL. The exponential form alone does not establish that a proposed matrix has the required marginals, nor does a feasible matrix alone identify dual potentials. In addition, the assertion concerns every optimizer: a choice of zero source weight would leave that source's coupling unconstrained by the objective, and a zero target entry would put a logarithmic column update on the boundary. These are substantive edge cases of the formulas, not merely notation.

Formalization scope

Lean uses Fin S, Fin n, and Fin (n_s) for the finite index sets; these are zero based versions of the book's one based indices. Histograms and potentials are real vectors, costs and couplings are real matrices, and the Gibbs kernel is defined entrywise. The theorem requires S,n,ns>0S,n,n_s>0S,n,ns​>0, ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, strictly positive weights λs\lambda_sλs​ that sum to one, and strictly positive input histograms bsb_sbs​ that each sum to one. The strict positivity of weights and input entries is an explicit restriction beyond (9.15)–(9.21), needed for a statement about every optimizer and finite logarithmic potentials. Entropy uses 0log⁡0=00\log0=00log0=0 on nonnegative couplings. The shared row marginal is constructed by the constraints on the PsP_sPs​; it is not a free histogram unrelated to them.

The definition layer includes finite matrix pairing, entropy, generalized KL, the Gibbs kernel, feasibility, and primal and dual objective functions. The KL conjugate identities and the block optimizer are separate theorem targets so they can be reused in other entropic transport developments. The main theorem asserts primal and dual attainment as well as their relationship; it does not assume strong duality or an optimal scaling as an input. The page has slips in the dimensions of the marginal equations and a missing subscript on KKK in (9.17); the Lean statements use the dimensions specified by Ps∈Rn×nsP_s\in\mathbb R^{n\times n_s}Ps​∈Rn×ns​. The optional cost-gradient Proposition 9.2 on pp. 519–520 and the fsf_sfs​ block update (9.19)–(9.20) lie outside this proposal.

Selected references

  • Gabriel Peyré and Marco Cuturi, Computational Optimal Transport, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 11(5–6):355–607, 2019. DOI: 10.1561/2200000073.
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Information TheoryMachine LearningOptimal Transport·Captain: mikedeng1

Computational Optimal Transport IX: The Entropic Cost L^ε_C(a, b) Equals max ⟨f, a⟩ + ⟨g, b⟩ − ε⟨e^{f/ε}, K e^{g/ε}⟩, with Optimal Scalings (e^{f/ε}, e^{g/ε})Textbook

Motivation

Optimal transport compares two distributions by finding the least expensive way to move mass between them. For finite histograms, the resulting linear program is precise but its optimal coupling can be sparse. In applications where the coupling represents traffic, matching, or a differentiable loss, a sparse plan may be undesirable or expensive to compute repeatedly. Peyré and Cuturi describe how adding an entropy term selects a diffuse coupling and leads to matrix scaling algorithms that can be used on large finite problems (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, Chapter 4).

The entropic dual gives a second view of the same regularized problem. Its variables are real vectors attached to the two marginal constraints. Unlike the ordinary Kantorovich dual, the objective has no explicit feasibility constraints and is smooth. This permits calculations in the log domain, which the book introduces because direct scaling with exponentials can suffer from numerical overflow or underflow when the regularization parameter is small relative to the costs (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, §4.4). This mission targets the exact relationship between the regularized minimum, the smooth dual maximum, and the scaling factors.

Setting

Fix positive integers n,mn,mn,m. A histogram a∈Σna\in\Sigma_na∈Σn​ is a vector with nonnegative entries summing to one; b∈Σmb\in\Sigma_mb∈Σm​ is defined similarly. Strict positivity is required for the attained dual maximum and log-domain updates; the primal scaling and Kantorovich-feasibility statements also cover zero-entry histograms. A coupling P∈U(a,b)P\in U(a,b)P∈U(a,b) is an n×mn\times mn×m matrix with nonnegative entries, row sums aaa, and column sums bbb. A real matrix CCC assigns cost CijC_{ij}Cij​ to each transfer from row iii to column jjj, and ⟨C,P⟩=∑i,jCijPij\langle C,P\rangle=\sum_{i,j}C_{ij}P_{ij}⟨C,P⟩=∑i,j​Cij​Pij​ is its transport cost.

The book uses the entropy H(P)=−∑i,jPij(log⁡Pij−1)H(P)=-\sum_{i,j}P_{ij}(\log P_{ij}-1)H(P)=−∑i,j​Pij​(logPij​−1), with 0log⁡0=00\log0=00log0=0. For ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, the regularized cost is LCε(a,b)=min⁡P∈U(a,b){⟨C,P⟩−εH(P)}L_C^\varepsilon(a,b)=\min_{P\in U(a,b)}\{\langle C,P\rangle-\varepsilon H(P)\}LCε​(a,b)=minP∈U(a,b)​{⟨C,P⟩−εH(P)}. The Gibbs kernel has entries Kij=exp⁡(−Cij/ε)K_{ij}=\exp(-C_{ij}/\varepsilon)Kij​=exp(−Cij​/ε). Given potentials f∈Rnf\in\mathbb R^nf∈Rn and g∈Rmg\in\mathbb R^mg∈Rm, the smooth dual objective is Q(f,g)=⟨f,a⟩+⟨g,b⟩−ε∑i,jefi/εKijegj/εQ(f,g)=\langle f,a\rangle+\langle g,b\rangle-\varepsilon\sum_{i,j}e^{f_i/\varepsilon}K_{ij}e^{g_j/\varepsilon}Q(f,g)=⟨f,a⟩+⟨g,b⟩−ε∑i,j​efi​/εKij​egj​/ε. These are the finite-dimensional objects of (4.1), (4.2), and (4.30) in the source (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, pp. 425, 428, 448).

Formalization targets

Attained entropic duality

The goal is Proposition 4.4. There are an optimal coupling PPP and potentials (f,g)(f,g)(f,g) at which the dual reaches its maximum, with the common value

LCε(a,b)=⟨C,P⟩−εH(P)=max⁡f′,g′Q(f′,g′).L_C^\varepsilon(a,b) =\langle C,P\rangle-\varepsilon H(P) =\max_{f',g'} Q(f',g').LCε​(a,b)=⟨C,P⟩−εH(P)=f′,g′max​Q(f′,g′).

For every maximizing pair (f′,g′)(f',g')(f′,g′), the same optimal coupling satisfies

Pij=efi′/εKijegj′/ε.P_{ij}=e^{f'_i/\varepsilon}K_{ij}e^{g'_j/\varepsilon}.Pij​=efi′​/εKij​egj′​/ε.

Thus the dual potentials determine the scaling vectors u=ef′/εu=e^{f'/\varepsilon}u=ef′/ε and v=eg′/εv=e^{g'/\varepsilon}v=eg′/ε in (4.12). The maximum is an attained maximum of a real function, as stated in the book, rather than an unrestricted real infimum or supremum that might take a default value on a bad input (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, Proposition 4.4).

Supporting results

The milestones follow the source's statements. Proposition 4.3 gives existence, uniqueness, and the Gibbs scaling of the primal optimizer. Remark 4.21 gives the two partial-gradient formulas and the closed log-domain block updates. Proposition 4.5 states that an entropic dual maximizer is a feasible pair of ordinary Kantorovich potentials, so its linear objective is bounded above by the unregularized cost LC(a,b)L_C(a,b)LC​(a,b) (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, pp. 432, 449, 452–453).

Significance

The equality establishes that the matrix scaling variables and the dual potentials describe the same optimal coupling. It lets a computation based on scaling be interpreted as maximizing a smooth objective, and it gives exact marginal-error expressions through the dual gradients. Feasible Kantorovich potentials obtained at the optimum also provide a lower bound on the ordinary transport cost. These statements explain why log-domain updates represent the same mathematical problem as entropic transport, even when direct exponentiation is numerically fragile (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, §§4.4–4.5).

The results are established in the textbook; the open work here is their Lean formalization. A completed development would provide reusable finite coupling, entropy, Gibbs-kernel, and smooth-dual interfaces, together with the existence and differentiability results needed to connect them. It would also distinguish a primal optimum, a dual maximum, and a feasible potential without relying on informal convention. The mission does not assert that these textbook results are new, and no machine-checked proof of these exact statements is claimed here.

Difficulty

The unconstrained dual objective has a symmetry: shifting every coordinate of fff by one constant and every coordinate of ggg by its negative leaves the value unchanged. Consequently, the set of maximizers is not bounded in the ordinary product space. Positivity of the marginals matters for attaining a maximum with finite real potentials; if a marginal entry is zero, the corresponding potential can escape toward negative infinity. On the primal side, the entropy formula must be valid at zero entries even though optimality links it to strictly positive exponential scalings. The formal argument must connect these boundary conventions and the finite-dimensional optimization statements without turning the maximum into a junk real supremum (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, Proposition 4.4 and Remark 4.21).

Formalization scope

The Lean development represents indices by Fin n and Fin m, matrices by Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ, and histograms by Mathlib's stdSimplex. Positive dimensions and ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 appear throughout. Strictly positive marginal entries are required for the attained dual maximum and log-domain updates; the other statements permit zero entries. The book assumes positive weights for discrete measures in Remark 2.1; the marginal positivity is also required for the attained dual maximum and the logarithmic updates. The cost matrix itself may have arbitrary real entries. Entropy uses Real.negMulLog, which implements 0log⁡0=00\log0=00log0=0 on the nonnegative couplings where it is applied.

The primal optimum is a predicate on a coupling and its objective, rather than a chosen matrix. The unregularized LCL_CLC​ is a real infimum used only when simplex marginals make its feasible set nonempty and bounded. The dual objective is a finite sum. Its gradients are stated as one-variable derivatives in each coordinate, and each block update is characterized as the unique maximizer with the other block fixed. The complete development needs Mathlib's finite sums, real exponential and logarithm, calculus, finite-dimensional topology, and optimization facts. Contributions that establish these shared interfaces or the four milestone statements are in scope.

Propositions 4.7 and 4.8 are excluded from this proposal because their printed bounds compare a dual linear objective with LCεL_C^\varepsilonLCε​ where the accompanying arguments instead support a comparison with the unregularized LCL_CLC​; (4.47) also has a sign discrepancy. The milestone list therefore avoids encoding a false inequality (Peyré and Cuturi, 2019, pp. 453–454).

Selected references

  • Gabriel Peyré and Marco Cuturi, Computational Optimal Transport, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 11(5–6), 2019, pp. 355–607. DOI: 10.1561/2200000073.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear OptimizationMachine LearningOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Strong Mixed-Integer Programming Formulations for Trained Neural Networks 1: A ReLU Neuron over a Box Has an Ideal Formulation with One Binary Variable and the Exponential Family (6b)Research Paper

Why optimize over a trained ReLU neuron

A trained feed-forward neural network with ReLU activations, ReLU(v)=max⁡{0,v}\mathrm{ReLU}(v)=\max\{0,v\}ReLU(v)=max{0,v}, is a piecewise linear function of its input. Many tasks ask for an optimization over such a network with its weights held fixed: verifying that no small perturbation of an image changes its classification, finding adversarial examples, or embedding a learned model of demand or cost inside a decision problem ("predict, then optimize"). The standard way to solve such problems exactly is mixed-integer programming (MIP): each neuron is written as a small set of linear constraints with one binary variable, and the network is the composition of these neuron formulations. How strong each neuron formulation is decides how fast branch-and-bound can close the gap.

The formulation used in the literature up to 2018 is the big-M formulation. It is valid but weak. This mission formalizes the main result of Anderson, Huchette, Tjandraatmadja and Vielma, IPCO 2019 extended abstract (arXiv:1811.08359v2), which gives the strongest possible formulation of a single ReLU neuron that uses the original variables and one binary variable only.

Timeline. Big-M formulations of ReLU networks were used by several groups in 2017–2018 for verification and adversarial analysis (see §1.2 of the paper). Balas's disjunctive programming (1985, 1998) and the multiple choice formulation of piecewise linear functions (Vielma and Nemhauser, Math. Program. 2011) give an ideal formulation of the neuron that needs a copy of the input variables. Anderson et al. (2019) project out that copy and obtain the formulation (6) below; a longer journal version (Math. Program. 2020, with W. Ma) develops the analysis further, including interactions between neurons.

Setting

Fix η∈N\eta\in\mathbb Nη∈N, a weight vector w∈Rηw\in\mathbb R^\etaw∈Rη, a bias b∈Rb\in\mathbb Rb∈R, and bounds L,U∈RηL,U\in\mathbb R^\etaL,U∈Rη with Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ for every iii. The neuron computes ReLU(f(x))\mathrm{ReLU}(f(x))ReLU(f(x)) for the affine function f(x)=w⋅x+bf(x)=w\cdot x+bf(x)=w⋅x+b on the box [L,U]={x:L≤x≤U}[L,U]=\{x: L\le x\le U\}[L,U]={x:L≤x≤U}. Its graph is

gr⁡(ReLU∘f;[L,U])={(x,ReLU(f(x))):L≤x≤U}.\operatorname{gr}(\mathrm{ReLU}\circ f;[L,U])=\{(x,\mathrm{ReLU}(f(x))) : L\le x\le U\}.gr(ReLU∘f;[L,U])={(x,ReLU(f(x))):L≤x≤U}.

The sign-adjusted bounds are L˘i=Li\breve L_i=L_iL˘i​=Li​, U˘i=Ui\breve U_i=U_iU˘i​=Ui​ when wi≥0w_i\ge 0wi​≥0, and L˘i=Ui\breve L_i=U_iL˘i​=Ui​, U˘i=Li\breve U_i=L_iU˘i​=Li​ when wi<0w_i<0wi​<0. Then M+(f)=w⋅U˘+bM^+(f)=w\cdot\breve U+bM+(f)=w⋅U˘+b and M−(f)=w⋅L˘+bM^-(f)=w\cdot\breve L+bM−(f)=w⋅L˘+b are the maximum and minimum of fff on [L,U][L,U][L,U], and supp⁡(w)={i:wi≠0}\operatorname{supp}(w)=\{i: w_i\ne 0\}supp(w)={i:wi​=0}. Strict activity means M−(f)<0<M+(f)M^-(f)<0<M^+(f)M−(f)<0<M+(f): the neuron is neither always off nor always on. The paper assumes throughout that Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ and that strict activity holds.

A set RRR of points (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z) with z∈[0,1]z\in[0,1]z∈[0,1], read together with the constraint z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}, is a formulation of the graph if (x,y)(x,y)(x,y) lies on the graph exactly when (x,y,z)∈R(x,y,z)\in R(x,y,z)∈R for some z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}; RRR is then its LP relaxation. The formulation is ideal if every extreme point of RRR has z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}.

The big-M formulation (3) is y≥f(x)y\ge f(x)y≥f(x), y≤f(x)−M−(f)(1−z)y\le f(x)-M^-(f)(1-z)y≤f(x)−M−(f)(1−z), y≤M+(f)zy\le M^+(f)zy≤M+(f)z, (x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0×{0,1}(x,y,z)\in[L,U]\times\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times\{0,1\}(x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0​×{0,1}. The formulation of Proposition 1 is

y≥w⋅x+b(6a)y≤∑i∈Iwi(xi−L˘i(1−z))+(b+∑i∉IwiU˘i)z∀I⊆supp⁡(w)(6b)(x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0×{0,1}.(6c)\begin{aligned} &y\ge w\cdot x+b &&(6a)\\ &y\le\sum_{i\in I}w_i\bigl(x_i-\breve L_i(1-z)\bigr)+\Bigl(b+\sum_{i\notin I}w_i\breve U_i\Bigr)z\qquad\forall I\subseteq\operatorname{supp}(w) &&(6b)\\ &(x,y,z)\in[L,U]\times\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times\{0,1\}. &&(6c) \end{aligned}​y≥w⋅x+by≤i∈I∑​wi​(xi​−L˘i​(1−z))+(b+i∈/I∑​wi​U˘i​)z∀I⊆supp(w)(x,y,z)∈[L,U]×R≥0​×{0,1}.​​(6a)(6b)(6c)​

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 1 (p. 6)

(6a)–(6c) is a formulation of gr⁡(ReLU∘f;[L,U]), and every extreme point of its LP relaxation has z∈{0,1}.\text{(6a)–(6c) is a formulation of }\operatorname{gr}(\mathrm{ReLU}\circ f;[L,U]),\ \text{and every extreme point of its LP relaxation has } z\in\{0,1\}.(6a)–(6c) is a formulation of gr(ReLU∘f;[L,U]), and every extreme point of its LP relaxation has z∈{0,1}.

Milestones (Appendix A.1 and §2.2)

  1. The multiple choice formulation (5), with copies x0,x1,y0,y1x^0,x^1,y^0,y^1x0,x1,y0,y1, has only integral zzz at extreme points in its lifted space and formulates the graph; projected to (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z), its LP relaxation is the convex hull of its points with z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1} (§2.2, pp. 5–6).
  2. Projecting the copies out of the LP relaxation of (5) gives the linear system (7): (6a), (6b), a second exponential family (7c), and the bounds (7d) (App. A.1, p. 14).
  3. The family (7c) is implied by the other constraints (App. A.1, pp. 14–15).
  4. The LP relaxation of (6) is the convex hull of its points with z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1} (App. A.1, p. 14).

Companion results

  • M±(f)M^\pm(f)M±(f) are the maximum and minimum of fff on [L,U][L,U][L,U] (§1.3, p. 4).
  • Proposition 3 (p. 7): for (x^,y^,z^)∈[L,U]×R≥0×[0,1](\hat x,\hat y,\hat z)\in[L,U]\times\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times[0,1](x^,y^​,z^)∈[L,U]×R≥0​×[0,1], if some inequality of (6b) is violated, the one for I^={i∈supp⁡(w):wix^i<wi(L˘i(1−z^)+U˘iz^)}\hat I=\{i\in\operatorname{supp}(w): w_i\hat x_i<w_i(\breve L_i(1-\hat z)+\breve U_i\hat z)\}I^={i∈supp(w):wi​x^i​<wi​(L˘i​(1−z^)+U˘i​z^)} is the most violated.
  • The big-M formulation (3) is a formulation of the graph (p. 4); Examples 1 and 2 (p. 5) show that it is not ideal and that its gap grows like 12γη\tfrac12\gamma\eta21​γη; its inequalities (3b), (3c) are (6b) for I=supp⁡(w)I=\operatorname{supp}(w)I=supp(w) and I=∅I=\emptysetI=∅ (p. 7).

Significance

Proposition 1 says that the convex hull of the graph, lifted with one binary variable, is described by (6a), (6b) and the bounds, with no auxiliary continuous variables. Optimizing a linear function over the LP relaxation of (6) therefore gives the tightest convex relaxation available for a single neuron, and Proposition 3 gives a separation routine linear in η\etaη, so the exponential family can be added on demand to a big-M model. The paper's experiments (§3, not formalized) report that separating over (6b) solves smaller MNIST verification instances faster than Gurobi's default cut generation by a factor of 7.

The result is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. To our knowledge none of these statements has a machine-checked proof. The work this mission asks for is the formalization of the known proof: an ideality statement for the multiple choice formulation, a Fourier–Motzkin projection carried out for an arbitrary index set with general-sign weights, and the passage from a hull identity to integrality of extreme points.

Difficulty

The formulation half of Proposition 1 is a short case analysis on z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}; the content is ideality. The obvious attempt, characterizing the extreme points of the LP relaxation of (6) directly, is impractical: the polytope is cut out by 2∣supp⁡(w)∣2^{|\operatorname{supp}(w)|}2∣supp(w)∣ inequalities, and showing that every point with fractional zzz is a proper convex combination of feasible points means handling all patterns of tight inequalities of (6b) at once. Ideality of the extended formulation (5) is classical and passes to its projection onto (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z), but that only helps once the projection is known to be exactly the LP relaxation of (6): it has to be computed for an arbitrary index set, and every inequality it produces must be shown to be one of (6a), (6b), the bounds, or implied by them. Weights of both signs must be handled throughout: the page treats negative weights by a change of variables, and a formal development has to carry the sign-adjusted bounds L˘,U˘\breve L,\breve UL˘,U˘ through every step.

Formalization scope

Inputs x∈Rηx\in\mathbb R^\etax∈Rη are Fin η → ℝ, so indices are 0-based; points (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z) are (Fin η → ℝ) × ℝ × ℝ. A formulation is encoded by its LP relaxation RRR (with z∈[0,1]z\in[0,1]z∈[0,1]) and the predicate "(x,y)∈S(x,y)\in S(x,y)∈S iff (x,y,z)∈R(x,y,z)\in R(x,y,z)∈R for some z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}"; ideality is ∀ p ∈ Set.extremePoints ℝ R, p.2.2 = 0 ∨ p.2.2 = 1. M±(f)M^\pm(f)M±(f) are defined by their closed forms, and a companion theorem proves that they are the maximum and minimum. In (6b) and (7c), "i∉Ii\notin Ii∈/I" ranges over all indices outside III, zero weights included. The system (7) is stated with L˘,U˘\breve L,\breve UL˘,U˘, i.e. after undoing the page's substitution x~i=−xi\tilde x_i=-x_ix~i​=−xi​; for w≥0w\ge 0w≥0 it is the page's display. The LP relaxation of (5) is represented both in its lifted space and projected to (x,y,z)(x,y,z)(x,y,z), with the copies quantified existentially in the latter, and constant bbb is scaled by 1−z1-z1−z in (5b) and by zzz in (5c).

The goal carries both standing assumptions of §1.3 (Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ and strict activity) and nothing else. Milestones that do not need strict activity omit it, which makes them stronger. Example 2 includes the page's γ=0\gamma=0γ=0 boundary: although its box then violates Li<UiL_i<U_iLi​<Ui​ when η>0\eta>0η>0, the example's three stated claims remain true.

Ideality is a statement about the LP relaxation, not about the set with z∈{0,1}z\in\{0,1\}z∈{0,1}: applied to the latter it would hold trivially, and a goal stating only that (6) is a formulation would omit the result's content. Both are ruled out by the statement of the goal.

A complete development needs: extreme points and convex hulls of polyhedra in product spaces (Mathlib), the hull of a union of two polytopes as a projection, Fourier–Motzkin elimination over an arbitrary finite index set, and finite-sum manipulations over subsets of supp⁡(w)\operatorname{supp}(w)supp(w). The Fourier–Motzkin and disjunctive-hull lemmas are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of either are welcome, as are proofs of the companion results.

Source: the IPCO 2019 extended abstract, arXiv:1811.08359v2 (28 Feb 2019); all labels and pages refer to that version.

Selected references

  • R. Anderson, J. Huchette, C. Tjandraatmadja, J. P. Vielma, Strong mixed-integer programming formulations for trained neural networks, IPCO 2019 (LNCS 11480), extended abstract. arXiv:1811.08359v2
  • R. Anderson, J. Huchette, W. Ma, C. Tjandraatmadja, J. P. Vielma, Strong mixed-integer programming formulations for trained neural networks, Mathematical Programming 183 (2020) 3–39. doi:10.1007/s10107-020-01474-5, arXiv:1811.01988
  • J. P. Vielma, G. Nemhauser, Modeling disjunctive constraints with a logarithmic number of binary variables and constraints, Mathematical Programming 128 (2011) 49–72. doi:10.1007/s10107-009-0295-4
  • E. Balas, Disjunctive programming and a hierarchy of relaxations for discrete optimization problems, SIAM Journal on Algebraic and Discrete Methods 6(3) (1985) 466–486. doi:10.1137/0606047
  • E. Balas, Disjunctive programming: properties of the convex hull of feasible points, Discrete Applied Mathematics 89 (1998) 3–44. doi:10.1016/S0166-218X(98)00136-X
  • J. P. Vielma, Mixed integer linear programming formulation techniques, SIAM Review 57(1) (2015) 3–57. doi:10.1137/130915303
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Block Successive Upper-Bound Minimization Method of Multipliers for Linearly Constrained Convex Optimization 1: Cyclic BSUM-M Converges to Primal-Dual Optimal SolutionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, machine learning and power systems have the form of a convex objective that is a sum of a smooth coupled term and nonsmooth block-separable terms, minimized subject to linear equality constraints that couple KKK blocks of variables: basis pursuit, demand response control in smart grids, and distributed estimation are the examples of Hong, Chang, Wang, Razaviyayn, Ma, Luo. The alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) handles two blocks well, but for K≥3K\ge3K≥3 blocks the directly extended Gauss–Seidel ADMM can diverge (Chen, He, Ye, Yuan, 2016), and convergence proofs for multi-block schemes usually need strong convexity or extra correction steps.

The block successive upper-bound minimization method of multipliers (BSUM-M) is the paper's answer: each block is updated by minimizing a local upper bound of the augmented Lagrangian, which makes the subproblems simple (for instance closed-form proximal steps), and the multiplier is updated by a dual gradient step with a small or diminishing stepsize. The main theorem shows that this scheme converges to primal and dual optimal solutions for any number of blocks without strong convexity, under an error bound.

Setting

The variable is x=(x1,…,xK)x=(x_1,\dots,x_K)x=(x1​,…,xK​), xk∈Rnkx_k\in\mathbb R^{n_k}xk​∈Rnk​, with the Euclidean norm ∥x∥2=∑k∥xk∥2\|x\|^2=\sum_k\|x_k\|^2∥x∥2=∑k​∥xk​∥2. Problem (1.1) is

min⁡x f(x)=g(x)+∑k=1Khk(xk)s.t.Ex=∑k=1KEkxk=q,xk∈Xk.\min_x\ f(x)=g(x)+\sum_{k=1}^K h_k(x_k)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad Ex=\sum_{k=1}^KE_kx_k=q,\quad x_k\in X_k .xmin​ f(x)=g(x)+k=1∑K​hk​(xk​)s.t.Ex=k=1∑K​Ek​xk​=q,xk​∈Xk​.

Under the standing Assumption A, g(x)=ℓ(Ax)+⟨x,b⟩g(x)=\ell(Ax)+\langle x,b\rangleg(x)=ℓ(Ax)+⟨x,b⟩ with ℓ\ellℓ strictly convex and continuously differentiable and AAA any matrix; hk(xk)=λk∥xk∥1+∑JwJ∥xk,J∥2h_k(x_k)=\lambda_k\|x_k\|_1+\sum_Jw_J\|x_{k,J}\|_2hk​(xk​)=λk​∥xk​∥1​+∑J​wJ​∥xk,J​∥2​ is a mixed ℓ1/ℓ2\ell_1/\ell_2ℓ1​/ℓ2​ norm with nonnegative weights; each Xk={xk∣Ckxk≤ck}X_k=\{x_k\mid C_kx_k\le c_k\}Xk​={xk​∣Ck​xk​≤ck​} is a compact polyhedron and X=∏kXkX=\prod_kX_kX=∏k​Xk​; the problem is feasible and the dual optimal value is attained.

For ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, the augmented Lagrangian is L(x;y)=f(x)+⟨y,q−Ex⟩+ρ2∥q−Ex∥2L(x;y)=f(x)+\langle y,q-Ex\rangle+\frac\rho2\|q-Ex\|^2L(x;y)=f(x)+⟨y,q−Ex⟩+2ρ​∥q−Ex∥2, the augmented dual is d(y)=min⁡x∈XL(x;y)d(y)=\min_{x\in X}L(x;y)d(y)=minx∈X​L(x;y), and X(y)=arg⁡min⁡x∈XL(x;y)X(y)=\arg\min_{x\in X}L(x;y)X(y)=argminx∈X​L(x;y). For x∈Xx\in Xx∈X, xˉ\bar xxˉ denotes the point of X(y)X(y)X(y) nearest to xxx.

Assumption B concerns the approximation functions uk(vk;x)u_k(v_k;x)uk​(vk​;x): each upper-bounds G(x)=g(x)+ρ2∥Ex−q∥2G(x)=g(x)+\frac\rho2\|Ex-q\|^2G(x)=g(x)+2ρ​∥Ex−q∥2 along block kkk, is tight with matching gradient at vk=xkv_k=x_kvk​=xk​, is continuous, strongly convex in vkv_kvk​ with a uniform modulus γk>0\gamma_k>0γk​>0, and has an LkL_kLk​-Lipschitz gradient in vkv_kvk​.

BSUM-M (1.12). From x1∈Xx^1\in Xx1∈X and any y1y^1y1, for r≥1r\ge1r≥1:

yr+1=yr+αr(q−Exr),xkr+1=arg⁡min⁡xk∈Xkuk(xk;wkr+1)−⟨yr+1,Ekxk⟩+hk(xk),y^{r+1}=y^r+\alpha^r(q-Ex^r),\qquad x_k^{r+1}=\arg\min_{x_k\in X_k}u_k(x_k;w_k^{r+1})-\langle y^{r+1},E_kx_k\rangle+h_k(x_k),yr+1=yr+αr(q−Exr),xkr+1​=argxk​∈Xk​min​uk​(xk​;wkr+1​)−⟨yr+1,Ek​xk​⟩+hk​(xk​),

for k=1,…,Kk=1,\dots,Kk=1,…,K in order, with the Gauss–Seidel point wkr+1=(x1r+1,…,xk−1r+1,xkr,…,xKr)w_k^{r+1}=(x_1^{r+1},\dots,x_{k-1}^{r+1},x_k^r,\dots,x_K^r)wkr+1​=(x1r+1​,…,xk−1r+1​,xkr​,…,xKr​).

The proximal gradient is ∇~xL(x;y)=x−prox⁡(x−∇x(L(x;y)−h(x)))\tilde\nabla_xL(x;y)=x-\operatorname{prox}(x-\nabla_x(L(x;y)-h(x)))∇~x​L(x;y)=x−prox(x−∇x​(L(x;y)−h(x))) with prox⁡(z)=arg⁡min⁡u∈Xh(u)+12∥z−u∥2\operatorname{prox}(z)=\arg\min_{u\in X}h(u)+\frac12\|z-u\|^2prox(z)=argminu∈X​h(u)+21​∥z−u∥2. The error bound asks for τ>0\tau>0τ>0 with dist⁡(x,X(y))≤τ∥∇~xL(x;y)∥\operatorname{dist}(x,X(y))\le\tau\|\tilde\nabla_xL(x;y)\|dist(x,X(y))≤τ∥∇~x​L(x;y)∥ for all x∈Xx\in Xx∈X and all yyy.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1, part 1

Under Assumptions A and B and the error bound, there is αˉ>0\bar\alpha>0αˉ>0 such that for stepsizes αr>0\alpha^r>0αr>0 that are either constant with αr=α≤αˉ\alpha^r=\alpha\le\bar\alphaαr=α≤αˉ, or satisfy ∑rαr=∞\sum_r\alpha^r=\infty∑r​αr=∞ and αr→0\alpha^r\to0αr→0, every BSUM-M run satisfies

lim⁡r→∞∥Exr−q∥=0,lim⁡r→∞∥xr−xr+1∥=0,lim⁡r→∞∥xr−xˉr∥=0,\lim_{r\to\infty}\|Ex^r-q\|=0,\qquad\lim_{r\to\infty}\|x^r-x^{r+1}\|=0,\qquad\lim_{r\to\infty}\|x^r-\bar x^r\|=0,r→∞lim​∥Exr−q∥=0,r→∞lim​∥xr−xr+1∥=0,r→∞lim​∥xr−xˉr∥=0,

and every limit point of {(xr,yr)}\{(x^r,y^r)\}{(xr,yr)} is a primal and dual optimal solution. The threshold αˉ\bar\alphaαˉ is not specified; no rate is claimed.

Milestones

Lemma 2.3(1) (one sweep decreases L(⋅;yr+1)L(\cdot;y^{r+1})L(⋅;yr+1) by γ∥xr−xr+1∥2\gamma\|x^r-x^{r+1}\|^2γ∥xr−xr+1∥2), Lemma 2.5(1) (dual gap decrease), Lemma 2.6(1) (primal gap bound), Lemma 2.4(1) (the proximal gradient at xrx^rxr is O(∥xr+1−xr∥)O(\|x^{r+1}-x^r\|)O(∥xr+1−xr∥)) and Lemma 2.1 (differentiability of ddd, ∇d(y)=q−Ex(y)\nabla d(y)=q-Ex(y)∇d(y)=q−Ex(y), and Lipschitz continuity of ∇d\nabla d∇d on superlevel sets).

Significance

The theorem gives a convergent multi-block method of multipliers whose block subproblems may be replaced by any majorizer satisfying Assumption B, such as a linearized proximal step. It covers the cyclic Gauss–Seidel order, where the direct multi-block ADMM can fail, and it does not require strong convexity of fff (the matrix AAA need not have full column rank). The paper's randomized variant (part 2 of the same theorem) is a separate mission.

The result is proved in the paper (the proof of part 1 is described as following the steps written out for part 2). It has not been machine-checked. Formalization adds a verified account of the potential-function argument for a primal-dual method with inexact block updates, and checks three printed statements that need correction (see the scope section): a formal proof settles them.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to treat BSUM-M as an inexact dual gradient ascent on ddd, but a single Gauss–Seidel sweep does not compute x(yr+1)∈X(yr+1)x(y^{r+1})\in X(y^{r+1})x(yr+1)∈X(yr+1), so the dual step uses a gradient at the wrong point. Controlling that error requires relating the primal step length to the distance from X(y)X(y)X(y), which fails without an error bound: L(⋅;y)L(\cdot;y)L(⋅;y) is not strongly convex, X(y)X(y)X(y) need not be a singleton, and the proximal gradient can be small far from X(y)X(y)X(y). The cyclic order adds a second gap: block kkk is linearized at wkr+1w_k^{r+1}wkr+1​, not at xrx^rxr. With a constant stepsize the dual ascent must not outrun the primal descent, which is where the smallness threshold enters.

Formalization scope

Citation basis: the arXiv preprint arXiv:1401.7079v1 (28 Jan 2014); every index refers to that version, not to the revised journal version (Mathematics of Operations Research, 2020).

Representation: blocks are indexed by Fin K with K≥1K\ge1K≥1; the block space is PiLp 2 of Euclidean spaces (the Euclidean norm, not the sup norm). ℓ\ellℓ is real valued and C1C^1C1 on all of Rp\mathbb R^pRp, which specializes the paper's extended-valued ℓ\ellℓ. ddd, d∗d^*d∗ and f∗f^*f∗ are real infima and suprema over nonempty compact sets, where they are attained. The algorithm is a predicate on sequences indexed from r=1r=1r=1; argmin steps are minimality conditions, the minimizer being unique. The initial point is required to lie in XXX. "Sufficiently small" is an existential threshold quantified before the stepsizes and the run. ∥xr−xˉr∥\|x^r-\bar x^r\|∥xr−xˉr∥ is the distance from xrx^rxr to X(yr)X(y^r)X(yr). Limit points are cluster points of the joint sequence; boundedness of {yr}\{y^r\}{yr} is neither assumed nor concluded.

Interpretations and corrections, each labelled in the item's statement:

  • the proximity operator in (2.3) includes the constraint set XXX, as the paper's optimality relation (2.14) requires;
  • d(y)d(y)d(y) is min⁡x∈XL(x;y)\min_{x\in X}L(x;y)minx∈X​L(x;y); (1.9) prints g(x)g(x)g(x) and an unconstrained minimum;
  • (2.17) has ExrEx^rExr where its proof (2.19) has Exr−1Ex^{r-1}Exr−1; the proved inequality is stated;
  • (2.12) evaluates the proximal gradient at yry^ryr and is false at r=1r=1r=1; it is stated at yr+1y^{r+1}yr+1;
  • Lemma 2.1's clause "AkxkA_kx_kAk​xk​ constant on X(y)X(y)X(y)" fails for non-separable ℓ\ellℓ; it is stated as "AxAxAx constant".

The error bound is a hypothesis of the goal, as in the paper, and is not derived from Assumption A: the paper's Lemma 2.2 does not hold under Assumption A alone. A formalization that makes the hypotheses unsatisfiable, drops the run's dependence on yr+1y^{r+1}yr+1, or lets αˉ\bar\alphaαˉ depend on the run is not this theorem. A sanity check that the hypotheses are satisfiable (a one-block instance with a constant run) is part of the drafting record.

Infrastructure needed: proximity operators of convex functions restricted to polyhedra and their nonexpansiveness; Danskin-type differentiability of a parametric minimum over a compact set; smoothness of the augmented dual; elementary convergence lemmas for nonnegative sequences with summable decrements. These pieces are reusable for other augmented Lagrangian and ADMM analyses. Proofs of the milestones are welcome independently of the goal.

Selected references

  • M. Hong, T.-H. Chang, X. Wang, M. Razaviyayn, S. Ma, Z.-Q. Luo, A Block Successive Upper Bound Minimization Method of Multipliers for Linearly Constrained Convex Optimization, arXiv:1401.7079v1, 2014; Mathematics of Operations Research 45(3), 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1401.7079 , https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.2019.1010
  • M. Hong, Z.-Q. Luo, On the linear convergence of the alternating direction method of multipliers, Mathematical Programming 162, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-1034-2
  • M. Razaviyayn, M. Hong, Z.-Q. Luo, A unified convergence analysis of block successive minimization methods for nonsmooth optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 23(2), 2013. https://doi.org/10.1137/120891009
  • C. Chen, B. He, Y. Ye, X. Yuan, The direct extension of ADMM for multi-block convex minimization problems is not necessarily convergent, Mathematical Programming 155, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-014-0826-5
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Supplier Centrality and Auditing Priority in Socially Responsible Supply Chains I: Under Downstream Competition No Buyer Audits the Common Supplier in Any EquilibriumResearch Paper

Motivation

Brands are routinely held responsible for the labour and environmental practices of their suppliers. A brand that is linked in public to a non-compliant supplier loses consumer willingness to pay, and firms answer this risk by auditing their suppliers. Supply networks are not trees, however: one supplier often serves several competing brands. Chen, Qi and Dawande (SSRN 2889889, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2020) ask how the position of a supplier in such a network, and in particular its centrality (the number of buyers it serves), affects which suppliers get audited when buyers decide on their own, and when they audit jointly.

This mission formalizes the paper's answer for unilateral auditing by competing buyers (Sec. 4.2, Proposition 2). A companion mission treats joint auditing (Proposition 3).

Setting

Two buyers B1,B2B_1, B_2B1​,B2​ source from three suppliers: an independent supplier SiS_iSi​ for each buyer BiB_iBi​, and a common supplier ScS_cSc​ that serves both. Each supplier complies with social-responsibility standards with probability e∈(0,1)e \in (0,1)e∈(0,1). In stage 1, buyer BiB_iBi​ chooses an auditing effort eii∈[0,1]e_{ii} \in [0,1]eii​∈[0,1] on SiS_iSi​ and eic∈[0,1]e_{ic} \in [0,1]eic​∈[0,1] on ScS_cSc​, and audits at most one of them: eii eic=0e_{ii}\,e_{ic} = 0eii​eic​=0. Auditing a supplier with effort x>0x > 0x>0 costs K+a2x2K + \tfrac a2 x^2K+2a​x2, with a fixed cost K≥0K \ge 0K≥0 and a>0a > 0a>0; effort 000 means no audit and costs nothing.

A non-compliant supplier that passes the audits is discovered in public with probability r∈(0,1]r \in (0,1]r∈(0,1]. Hence SiS_iSi​ causes damage to BiB_iBi​ with probability λI(eii)=r(1−e)(1−eii)\lambda_I(e_{ii}) = r(1-e)(1-e_{ii})λI​(eii​)=r(1−e)(1−eii​), and ScS_cSc​ causes damage to both buyers with probability λC(e1c,e2c)=r(1−e)(1−e1c)(1−e2c)\lambda_C(e_{1c},e_{2c}) = r(1-e)(1-e_{1c})(1-e_{2c})λC​(e1c​,e2c​)=r(1−e)(1−e1c​)(1−e2c​), independently. A buyer with at least one exposed supplier suffers the MWTP damage dM>0d_M > 0dM​>0: his demand intercept drops from α\alphaα to α−dM\alpha - d_Mα−dM​. Each exposed supplier is then paid w^≥w\hat w \ge ww^≥w per unit instead of www, so a buyer with n∈{0,1,2}n \in \{0,1,2\}n∈{0,1,2} exposed suppliers has unit cost (2−n)w+nw^(2-n)w + n\hat w(2−n)w+nw^.

In stage 2 the buyers compete in quantities with inverse demands pi=Ai−qi−βqi′p_i = A_i - q_i - \beta q_{i'}pi​=Ai​−qi​−βqi′​, β∈(0,1]\beta \in (0,1]β∈(0,1] (Dixit 1979; Singh and Vives 1984). Its equilibrium profit for B1B_1B1​ is π1b(n1,n2)=q1∗(n1,n2)2\pi^b_1(n_1,n_2) = q^*_1(n_1,n_2)^2π1b​(n1​,n2​)=q1∗​(n1​,n2​)2, in closed form (Lemma 1). Buyer B1B_1B1​'s ex ante expected profit Π1b(e11,e1c;e22,e2c)\Pi^b_1(e_{11},e_{1c};e_{22},e_{2c})Π1b​(e11​,e1c​;e22​,e2c​) is the expectation of π1b\pi^b_1π1b​ over the eight damage outcomes, minus his audit costs; Π2b\Pi^b_2Π2b​ is symmetric. Three conditions on (α,β,w,w^,dM)(\alpha,\beta,w,\hat w,d_M)(α,β,w,w^,dM​) (p. 8) make all stage-2 quantities positive.

An equilibrium is a profile (s1,s2)(s_1,s_2)(s1​,s2​), si=(eii,eic)s_i = (e_{ii},e_{ic})si​=(eii​,eic​), in which each buyer's strategy is a best response to the other's, with the tie-breaking rule of p. 10: a buyer who is indifferent between auditing and not auditing does not audit. Two explicit efforts, eI∗e^*_IeI∗​ (eq. (1)) and e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ (eq. (2)), are rational functions of the parameters; e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ is a buyer's optimal effort on his independent supplier when the rival audits nobody, and eI∗e^*_IeI∗​ is the symmetric solution when both audit their independent suppliers.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2

Assume β∈(0,1]\beta \in (0,1]β∈(0,1] and e^I<1\hat e_I < 1e^I​<1. There exist KuL<KuM<KuHK^L_u < K^M_u < K^H_uKuL​<KuM​<KuH​ such that for every K≥0K \ge 0K≥0, writing A=((eI∗,0),(eI∗,0))A = ((e^*_I,0),(e^*_I,0))A=((eI∗​,0),(eI∗​,0)), B1=((e^I,0),(0,0))B_1 = ((\hat e_I,0),(0,0))B1​=((e^I​,0),(0,0)), B2=((0,0),(e^I,0))B_2 = ((0,0),(\hat e_I,0))B2​=((0,0),(e^I​,0)), N=((0,0),(0,0))N = ((0,0),(0,0))N=((0,0),(0,0)),

EqSet(K)={{A}K<KuL,{A,B1,B2}KuL≤K<KuM,{B1,B2}KuM≤K<KuH,{N}K≥KuH.\mathrm{EqSet}(K) = \begin{cases} \{A\} & K < K^L_u,\\ \{A, B_1, B_2\} & K^L_u \le K < K^M_u,\\ \{B_1, B_2\} & K^M_u \le K < K^H_u,\\ \{N\} & K \ge K^H_u. \end{cases}EqSet(K)=⎩⎨⎧​{A}{A,B1​,B2​}{B1​,B2​}{N}​K<KuL​,KuL​≤K<KuM​,KuM​≤K<KuH​,K≥KuH​.​

In every equilibrium the common supplier receives zero effort.

Milestones

Lemma 1 (stage-2 equilibrium), the OA.2 expected-profit display, the best-response function (OA-9) with eI∗e^*_IeI∗​ and e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ as its values, the dominance inequality (OA-11), Lemmas OA5 and OA6 (the two kinds of auditing equilibria and their threshold ranges), the monotonicity facts (OA-14)–(OA-15), Lemma OA7 (the order of the thresholds) and Lemma OA8 (no equilibrium audits ScS_cSc​). The thresholds of the milestones are the explicit ones the proof defines in (OA-10), (OA-12), (OA-13).

Significance

The result separates network position from competition. Without downstream competition (β=0\beta = 0β=0, Proposition 1) there is a Pareto-dominant equilibrium in which one buyer audits the common supplier. With competition, Proposition 2 shows that the common supplier, the most central and therefore the most consequential source of risk, is never audited: auditing it would also protect the rival, who free-rides. This inefficiency is what motivates the paper's analysis of joint auditing (Proposition 3) and of social welfare (Proposition 4).

The result is proved in the paper, partly by omission: the e-companion leaves the proof of Lemma OA8 and the case K≥KuHK \ge K^H_uK≥KuH​ to the reader. No machine-checked version exists. A formal proof would give a complete case analysis of a two-stage game with a discontinuous fixed cost, a constrained strategy set and a tie-breaking rule, and would check the paper's closed forms, several of which are printed with small slips.

Difficulty

The first-order conditions alone do not determine the equilibria. The fixed cost makes each buyer's payoff discontinuous at zero effort, so every candidate must be compared with no audit, and the best response is a choice among three regimes (audit SiS_iSi​, audit ScS_cSc​, audit nobody). Uniqueness claims therefore require excluding every profile in the constrained strategy set, including those where a buyer audits the common supplier, for which the paper gives no proof. The threshold comparisons KuL<KuM<KuHK^L_u < K^M_u < K^H_uKuL​<KuM​<KuH​ rest on monotonicity in the rival's effort, and the expected profit is multilinear in the four efforts (plus the quadratic audit costs), with coefficients that are differences of squared Cournot quantities whose signs depend on the p. 8 conditions.

Formalization scope

All objects live in the namespace SupplierAudit.Competition. The source is the authors' accepted manuscript on SSRN (2889889); main-text printed pages equal PDF pages, and e-companion page ec kkk is PDF page 28+k28 + k28+k.

  • Parameters. A structure Params carries α,β,w,w^,dM,e,r,a\alpha, \beta, w, \hat w, d_M, e, r, aα,β,w,w^,dM​,e,r,a and the standing assumptions β∈[0,1]\beta \in [0,1]β∈[0,1], w≤w^w \le \hat ww≤w^, dM>0d_M > 0dM​>0, e∈(0,1)e \in (0,1)e∈(0,1), r∈(0,1]r \in (0,1]r∈(0,1], a>0a > 0a>0 and the three conditions of p. 8. The theorems add β>0\beta > 0β>0 (competition, Sec. 4.2). KKK is a separate real argument and the goal quantifies over K≥0K \ge 0K≥0.
  • Stage 2. The general linear differentiated Cournot duopoly is its own definition (CournotDuopoly). The model's stage-2 profit is the closed form q1∗(n1,n2)2q^*_1(n_1,n_2)^2q1∗​(n1​,n2​)2 for all (n1,n2)(n_1,n_2)(n1​,n2​); Lemma 1 states that it is the game's unique equilibrium.
  • Expected profit. Π1b\Pi^b_1Π1b​ is the eight-outcome expectation; Π2b\Pi^b_2Π2b​ is Π1b\Pi^b_1Π1b​ with the roles exchanged. The grouped display of OA.2 is a milestone.
  • Strategies and equilibrium. Strategies are pairs in [0,1]2[0,1]^2[0,1]2 with product zero. Equilibria include the strict-improvement tie-breaking rule of p. 10; without it the goal is false at K=KuMK = K^M_uK=KuM​ and K=KuHK = K^H_uK=KuH​.
  • Interior efforts. The paper assumes equilibrium efforts lie in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) (p. 10; sufficient conditions in OA.1 are not given in closed form). This is encoded as the single hypothesis e^I<1\hat e_I < 1e^I​<1 on the explicit formula (2), never as a hypothesis on an unknown equilibrium variable.
  • Thresholds. The goal states the thresholds existentially, as printed, with their order as part of the conclusion; the milestones use the explicit (OA-10), (OA-12), (OA-13). eI∗e^*_IeI∗​, e^I\hat e_Ie^I​ and e11∗(⋅)e^*_{11}(\cdot)e11∗​(⋅) are the printed formulas, not argmaxes.
  • Printed slips, corrected. In (OA-11) the second prefactor should be β(w^−w)\beta(\hat w - w)β(w^−w); only the strict inequality is stated. The printed derivative of e11∗e^*_{11}e11∗​ in the proof of Lemma OA7 lacks a factor 1/a1/a1/a; only monotonicity is stated.

A formalization in which equilibrium is plain Nash, efforts range over all of R\mathbb RR, a buyer may audit both suppliers, or "interior" is a hypothesis on the equilibrium efforts themselves would state a different (and in places false or vacuous) theorem; these are ruled out by the definitions above. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as is reusable infrastructure for linear Cournot duopolies and for finite expectations over independent Bernoulli events.

Selected references

  • F. Chen, A. Qi, M. Dawande, Supplier Centrality and Auditing Priority in Socially-Responsible Supply Chains, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2020 (accepted manuscript). https://ssrn.com/abstract=2889889
  • A. Dixit, A Model of Duopoly Suggesting a Theory of Entry Barriers, Bell Journal of Economics 10(1), 1979. https://doi.org/10.2307/3003317
  • N. Singh, X. Vives, Price and Quantity Competition in a Differentiated Duopoly, RAND Journal of Economics 15(4), 1984. https://doi.org/10.2307/2555525
  • E. L. Plambeck, T. A. Taylor, Supplier Evasion of a Buyer's Audit: Implications for Motivating Supplier Social and Environmental Responsibility, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 18(2), 2016. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2015.0550
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization 5: Dual Bounds from Active-Set Primal Solutions Lose Only O(kε), Independent of pResearch Paper

Motivation

Best-subset selection with ridge shrinkage, min⁡β12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∥β∥0+λ2∥β∥22\min_\beta \tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\lambda_0\|\beta\|_0+\lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^2minβ​21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​∥β∥0​+λ2​∥β∥22​, is a mixed-integer program that statisticians want to solve to certified optimality at the scale of modern data (ppp up to 10710^7107 features). Hazimeh, Mazumder and Saab (arXiv:2004.06152, Mathematical Programming 2022) built a branch-and-bound solver, L0BnB, whose node relaxations are solved in the primal space by active-set coordinate descent instead of by an interior-point method. Branch-and-bound prunes a node only with a valid dual bound, a certified lower bound on the node's relaxation value. A primal method returns an approximate minimizer, not such a bound, so the solver must turn an inexact primal point into a dual feasible point and needs to know how much is lost in doing so. This mission formalizes the paper's answer, its main theorem (Theorem 3).

Setting

Data are X∈Rn×pX\in\mathbb R^{n\times p}X∈Rn×p with columns X1,…,XpX_1,\dots,X_pX1​,…,Xp​, y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn, and parameters λ0,λ2,M>0\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M>0λ0​,λ2​,M>0. The reverse Huber penalty is B(t)=∣t∣\mathcal B(t)=|t|B(t)=∣t∣ for ∣t∣≤1|t|\le1∣t∣≤1 and (t2+1)/2(t^2+1)/2(t2+1)/2 for ∣t∣≥1|t|\ge1∣t∣≥1. The penalty ψ(b)\psi(b)ψ(b) equals ψ1(b)=2λ0B(bλ2/λ0)\psi_1(b)=2\lambda_0\mathcal B(b\sqrt{\lambda_2/\lambda_0})ψ1​(b)=2λ0​B(bλ2​/λ0​​) if λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M and ψ2(b)=(λ0/M+λ2M)∣b∣\psi_2(b)=(\lambda_0/M+\lambda_2M)|b|ψ2​(b)=(λ0​/M+λ2​M)∣b∣ otherwise. The reduced relaxation (5) is

min⁡β∈Rp F(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑iψ(βi)s.t.∥β∥∞≤M.\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}\ F(\beta)=\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\sum_{i}\psi(\beta_i)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad \|\beta\|_\infty\le M .β∈Rpmin​ F(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∑​ψ(βi​)s.t.∥β∥∞​≤M.

Throughout, the columns of XXX and yyy have unit ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ norm (the standing assumption of Section 3 of the paper).

Algorithm 2 (active-set coordinate descent) returns a point β^\hat\betaβ^​ in the box such that the set

V={i∉Supp⁡(β^): 0≠arg min⁡∣t∣≤MF(β^1,…,t,…,β^p)}V=\{i\notin\operatorname{Supp}(\hat\beta):\ 0\ne\operatorname*{arg\,min}_{|t|\le M}F(\hat\beta_1,\dots,t,\dots,\hat\beta_p)\}V={i∈/Supp(β^​): 0=∣t∣≤Margmin​F(β^​1​,…,t,…,β^​p​)}

is empty: no coordinate outside the support wants to move. Write r^=y−Xβ^\hat r=y-X\hat\betar^=y−Xβ^​, k=∥β^∥0k=\|\hat\beta\|_0k=∥β^​∥0​, and let β∗\beta^*β∗ be an optimal solution of (5) with r∗=y−Xβ∗r^*=y-X\beta^*r∗=y−Xβ∗. The primal gap is ϵ=∥X(β∗−β^)∥2\epsilon=\|X(\beta^*-\hat\beta)\|_2ϵ=∥X(β∗−β^​)∥2​.

The two duals of (5) (Theorem 2 of the paper) are, with v(α,γi)=[(α⊤Xi−γi)2/(4λ2)−λ0]++M∣γi∣v(\alpha,\gamma_i)=[(\alpha^\top X_i-\gamma_i)^2/(4\lambda_2)-\lambda_0]_++M|\gamma_i|v(α,γi​)=[(α⊤Xi​−γi​)2/(4λ2​)−λ0​]+​+M∣γi​∣,

h1(α,γ)=−12∥α∥22−α⊤y−∑iv(α,γi),h2(ρ,μ)=−12∥ρ∥22−ρ⊤y−M∥μ∥1,h_1(\alpha,\gamma)=-\tfrac12\|\alpha\|_2^2-\alpha^\top y-\textstyle\sum_i v(\alpha,\gamma_i),\qquad h_2(\rho,\mu)=-\tfrac12\|\rho\|_2^2-\rho^\top y-M\|\mu\|_1,h1​(α,γ)=−21​∥α∥22​−α⊤y−∑i​v(α,γi​),h2​(ρ,μ)=−21​∥ρ∥22​−ρ⊤y−M∥μ∥1​,

the latter under ∣ρ⊤Xi∣−μi≤λ0/M+λ2M|\rho^\top X_i|-\mu_i\le\lambda_0/M+\lambda_2M∣ρ⊤Xi​∣−μi​≤λ0​/M+λ2​M. The dual variables built from β∗\beta^*β∗ are α∗=ρ∗=−r∗\alpha^*=\rho^*=-r^*α∗=ρ∗=−r∗, γi∗=1[∣βi∗∣=M](α∗⊤Xi−2Mλ2sign⁡(α∗⊤Xi))\gamma^*_i=\mathbb 1_{[|\beta^*_i|=M]}(\alpha^{*\top}X_i-2M\lambda_2\operatorname{sign}(\alpha^{*\top}X_i))γi∗​=1[∣βi∗​∣=M]​(α∗⊤Xi​−2Mλ2​sign(α∗⊤Xi​)) and μi∗=1[∣βi∗∣=M](∣ρ∗⊤Xi∣−λ0/M−λ2M)\mu^*_i=\mathbb 1_{[|\beta^*_i|=M]}(|\rho^{*\top}X_i|-\lambda_0/M-\lambda_2M)μi∗​=1[∣βi∗​∣=M]​(∣ρ∗⊤Xi​∣−λ0​/M−λ2​M). The dual points built from β^\hat\betaβ^​ are α^=ρ^=−r^\hat\alpha=\hat\rho=-\hat rα^=ρ^​=−r^, with γ^\hat\gammaγ^​ a maximizer of h1(α^,⋅)h_1(\hat\alpha,\cdot)h1​(α^,⋅) (25) and μ^\hat\muμ^​ a maximizer of h2(ρ^,⋅)h_2(\hat\rho,\cdot)h2​(ρ^​,⋅) under the constraints (27).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 with the proof's constants

If λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M, with ci=(2λ2)−1c_i=(2\lambda_2)^{-1}ci​=(2λ2​)−1 when ∣βi∗∣<M|\beta^*_i|<M∣βi∗​∣<M and ci=Mc_i=Mci​=M when ∣βi∗∣=M|\beta^*_i|=M∣βi∗​∣=M,

h1(α^,γ^) ≥ h1(α∗,γ∗)−2ϵ−12ϵ2−∑i∈Supp⁡(β^)(ciϵ+(4λ2)−1ϵ2).(55)h_1(\hat\alpha,\hat\gamma)\ \ge\ h_1(\alpha^*,\gamma^*)-2\epsilon-\tfrac12\epsilon^2-\sum_{i\in\operatorname{Supp}(\hat\beta)}\big(c_i\epsilon+(4\lambda_2)^{-1}\epsilon^2\big).\qquad(55)h1​(α^,γ^​) ≥ h1​(α∗,γ∗)−2ϵ−21​ϵ2−i∈Supp(β^​)∑​(ci​ϵ+(4λ2​)−1ϵ2).(55)

If λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M,

h2(ρ^,μ^) ≥ h2(ρ∗,μ∗)−ϵ(2+Mk)−12ϵ2.(59)h_2(\hat\rho,\hat\mu)\ \ge\ h_2(\rho^*,\mu^*)-\epsilon(2+Mk)-\tfrac12\epsilon^2.\qquad(59)h2​(ρ^​,μ^​) ≥ h2​(ρ∗,μ∗)−ϵ(2+Mk)−21​ϵ2.(59)

The paper states these as −kO(ϵ)−kO(ϵ2)-kO(\epsilon)-kO(\epsilon^2)−kO(ϵ)−kO(ϵ2) (29) and −kO(ϵ)−O(ϵ2)-kO(\epsilon)-O(\epsilon^2)−kO(ϵ)−O(ϵ2) (30); the goal states the expressions its proof establishes.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them: the closed-form coordinate updates (14) and (15); Proposition 3, V={i∉Supp⁡(β^):∣⟨r^,Xi⟩∣>c(λ0,λ2,M)}V=\{i\notin\operatorname{Supp}(\hat\beta): |\langle\hat r,X_i\rangle|>c(\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M)\}V={i∈/Supp(β^​):∣⟨r^,Xi​⟩∣>c(λ0​,λ2​,M)}; the bound ∥α∗∥2≤1\|\alpha^*\|_2\le1∥α∗∥2​≤1; Lemma 2, which bounds v(α^,γ^i)v(\hat\alpha,\hat\gamma_i)v(α^,γ^​i​) coordinate by coordinate and makes it vanish off the support; inequality (53); the closed form (28) of μ^\hat\muμ^​; the optimality conditions (58); the bound (57) ∣μ^i∣≤ϵ+∣μi∗∣|\hat\mu_i|\le\epsilon+|\mu^*_i|∣μ^​i​∣≤ϵ+∣μi∗​∣ on the support; and inequality (56).

Significance

The result. In both regimes the loss of the dual bound is controlled by the primal gap times the sparsity kkk of the iterate, with constants depending only on MMM and λ2\lambda_2λ2​; the number of features ppp does not enter. Since L0BnB seeks solutions with k≪pk\ll pk≪p, the cheap dual bound obtained from an inexact primal solution is nearly as good as the exact one, which is what allows pruning without an interior-point solve at every node. The paper notes that with plain coordinate descent in place of Algorithm 2 the same argument gives ppp in place of kkk.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces a checked version of the main theorem with explicit constants, a formal model of what "output of an active-set method" means for the analysis, and reusable closed forms for the boxed soft-thresholding updates of an ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​- or reverse-Huber-penalized box-constrained least squares problem.

Difficulty

The bound is not a consequence of weak duality alone: weak duality says only that each dual value is below the primal optimum, and says nothing about how far the constructed dual point is from the dual optimum. The obvious estimate, a Lipschitz bound on h1h_1h1​ or h2h_2h2​ summed over all coordinates, gives a loss proportional to ppp. Getting kkk instead requires showing that the dual contribution of every coordinate outside Supp⁡(β^)\operatorname{Supp}(\hat\beta)Supp(β^​) vanishes exactly, which uses the emptiness of VVV through Proposition 3 and the closed forms (14)–(15) of one-dimensional nonsmooth box-constrained problems. On the support, the loss must be bounded using the structure of γ∗\gamma^*γ∗ and μ∗\mu^*μ∗ at coordinates where β∗\beta^*β∗ hits the box, which is where ci=Mc_i=Mci​=M and (58) enter.

Formalization scope

Indices are Fin p; norms are explicit sums; sign⁡\operatorname{sign}sign is Real.sign with sign⁡(0)=0\operatorname{sign}(0)=0sign(0)=0; [a]+[a]_+[a]+​ is max a 0. The unit norms of the columns of XXX and of yyy are hypotheses, never built into the definitions, and each theorem assumes only the ones it uses. β∗\beta^*β∗ is any point of the box minimizing FFF over the box. The output of Algorithm 2 is modelled by its two properties used in the paper: ∥β^∥∞≤M\|\hat\beta\|_\infty\le M∥β^​∥∞​≤M and V=∅V=\emptysetV=∅ ("0≠arg⁡min⁡0\ne\arg\min0=argmin" encoded as "000 is not a minimizer"); the iterations are not formalized. γ^\hat\gammaγ^​ and μ^\hat\muμ^​ are arbitrary maximizers satisfying (25) and (27). The dual variables (23)–(24) are defined by their formulas; their optimality (Theorem 2, a separate mission) is neither assumed nor needed, and the goal is an inequality between explicit numbers.

Instantiations of O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅). (29) is stated as (55): kO(ϵ)+kO(ϵ2)kO(\epsilon)+kO(\epsilon^2)kO(ϵ)+kO(ϵ2) becomes 2ϵ+12ϵ2+∑i∈Supp⁡(β^)(ciϵ+(4λ2)−1ϵ2)2\epsilon+\tfrac12\epsilon^2+\sum_{i\in\operatorname{Supp}(\hat\beta)}(c_i\epsilon+(4\lambda_2)^{-1}\epsilon^2)2ϵ+21​ϵ2+∑i∈Supp(β^​)​(ci​ϵ+(4λ2​)−1ϵ2) with ci∈{(2λ2)−1,M}c_i\in\{(2\lambda_2)^{-1},M\}ci​∈{(2λ2​)−1,M} decided by β∗\beta^*β∗. (30) is stated as (59): kO(ϵ)+O(ϵ2)kO(\epsilon)+O(\epsilon^2)kO(ϵ)+O(ϵ2) becomes ϵ(2+Mk)+12ϵ2\epsilon(2+Mk)+\tfrac12\epsilon^2ϵ(2+Mk)+21​ϵ2. The proof's final rearrangement of (29), which counts ∣β^i∣|\hat\beta_i|∣β^​i​∣ instead of ∣βi∗∣|\beta^*_i|∣βi∗​∣, is not used.

A formalization that takes β^=β∗\hat\beta=\beta^*β^​=β∗, γ^=γ∗\hat\gamma=\gamma^*γ^​=γ∗ or μ^=μ∗\hat\mu=\mu^*μ^​=μ∗, that drops the hypothesis V=∅V=\emptysetV=∅, or that replaces the constants by an existential "∃C\exists C∃C" would be trivial or a different statement; the goal quantifies over every optimal β∗\beta^*β∗, every box-feasible β^\hat\betaβ^​ with V=∅V=\emptysetV=∅ and every maximizer γ^\hat\gammaγ^​, μ^\hat\muμ^​, with the explicit constants above.

Needed infrastructure: one-dimensional convex minimization on an interval with piecewise penalties, Cauchy–Schwarz for finite sums, and first-order optimality conditions for box-constrained composite problems. Proofs of any milestone are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, A. Saab, Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization, arXiv:2004.06152v2, 2021; Mathematical Programming 196 (2022). https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.06152
  • P. Tseng, Convergence of a block coordinate descent method for nondifferentiable minimization, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 109 (2001). https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1017501703105
  • J. Friedman, T. Hastie, R. Tibshirani, Regularization paths for generalized linear models via coordinate descent, J. Stat. Softw. 33 (2010). https://doi.org/10.18637/jss.v033.i01
18 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationDynamical SystemsFunctional Analysis+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Tikhonov Regularization of a Second Order Dynamical System with Hessian Driven Damping 3: If ∫ ε(t)/t dt = +∞, the Trajectory Converges Strongly in the Ergodic Sense to the Minimum-Norm MinimizerResearch Paper

Motivation

Second order dynamical systems with vanishing damping are continuous-time models of accelerated first-order methods. The system x¨+αtx˙+∇g(x)=0\ddot x + \frac{\alpha}{t}\dot x + \nabla g(x) = 0x¨+tα​x˙+∇g(x)=0 is the continuous limit of Nesterov's accelerated gradient method (Su, Boyd, Candès 2016), and its trajectories converge weakly to a minimizer of a convex ggg when α>3\alpha>3α>3 (Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet, Redont 2018). Two modifications of this system have been studied separately. A Hessian-driven damping term β∇2g(x)x˙\beta\nabla^2 g(x)\dot xβ∇2g(x)x˙ damps oscillations and keeps the fast rates (Attouch, Peypouquet, Redont 2016). A Tikhonov regularization term ϵ(t)x\epsilon(t)xϵ(t)x with ϵ(t)→0\epsilon(t)\to0ϵ(t)→0 selects one minimizer, the one of minimum norm, and can turn weak convergence into strong convergence (Attouch, Chbani, Riahi 2018).

Boţ, Csetnek and László (arXiv:1911.12845v2, Math. Program. 2021) study the system with both terms. Their results split into two regimes according to how fast ϵ\epsilonϵ decays. This mission covers the slow-decay regime of §4.1, where ∫+∞ϵ(t)/t dt=+∞\int^{+\infty}\epsilon(t)/t\,dt=+\infty∫+∞ϵ(t)/tdt=+∞ and the trajectory approaches the minimum-norm minimizer in a weighted average sense.

Timeline. 2016: Su, Boyd and Candès derive the continuous model of Nesterov's method. 2016: Attouch, Peypouquet and Redont add Hessian-driven damping (α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3, β>0\beta>0β>0) and prove fast rates and weak convergence. 2018: Attouch, Chbani and Riahi add Tikhonov regularization without Hessian damping and prove, among other results, strong ergodic convergence to the minimum-norm minimizer when ∫ϵ(t)/t dt=+∞\int\epsilon(t)/t\,dt=+\infty∫ϵ(t)/tdt=+∞. 2020: Boţ, Csetnek and László combine both terms and extend that ergodic result (their Theorem 4.2).

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space, t0>0t_0>0t0​>0, α>0\alpha>0α>0, β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0, and u0,v0∈Hu_0,v_0\in\mathcal Hu0​,v0​∈H. The data satisfy the paper's General assumption:

  • g:H→Rg:\mathcal H\to\mathbb Rg:H→R is convex and twice Fréchet differentiable, its gradient ∇g\nabla g∇g is Lipschitz continuous on bounded sets, and argmin⁡g≠∅\operatorname{argmin} g\neq\emptysetargming=∅;
  • ϵ:[t0,+∞)→[0,+∞)\epsilon:[t_0,+\infty)\to[0,+\infty)ϵ:[t0​,+∞)→[0,+∞) is nonincreasing, of class C1C^1C1, and lim⁡t→+∞ϵ(t)=0\lim_{t\to+\infty}\epsilon(t)=0limt→+∞​ϵ(t)=0.

A global C2C^2C2-solution of system (5) is a twice continuously differentiable x:[t0,+∞)→Hx:[t_0,+\infty)\to\mathcal Hx:[t0​,+∞)→H with

x¨(t)+αtx˙(t)+β∇2g(x(t))x˙(t)+∇g(x(t))+ϵ(t)x(t)=0(t≥t0),x(t0)=u0, x˙(t0)=v0.\ddot x(t)+\frac{\alpha}{t}\dot x(t)+\beta\nabla^2 g(x(t))\dot x(t)+\nabla g(x(t))+\epsilon(t)x(t)=0\quad(t\ge t_0),\qquad x(t_0)=u_0,\ \dot x(t_0)=v_0 .x¨(t)+tα​x˙(t)+β∇2g(x(t))x˙(t)+∇g(x(t))+ϵ(t)x(t)=0(t≥t0​),x(t0​)=u0​, x˙(t0​)=v0​.

The set argmin⁡g\operatorname{argmin} gargming is nonempty, closed and convex, so it has a unique element of minimum norm, the minimum-norm minimizer x∗=argmin⁡{∥x∥:x∈argmin⁡g}x^*=\operatorname{argmin}\{\|x\|:x\in\operatorname{argmin} g\}x∗=argmin{∥x∥:x∈argming}. For ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0 the Tikhonov approximation curve is

xϵ=argmin⁡x∈H(g(x)+ϵ2∥x∥2),x_\epsilon=\operatorname*{argmin}_{x\in\mathcal H}\Big(g(x)+\frac{\epsilon}{2}\|x\|^2\Big),xϵ​=x∈Hargmin​(g(x)+2ϵ​∥x∥2),

the unique minimizer of a strongly convex function. Finally, hx∗(t)=12∥x(t)−x∗∥2h_{x^*}(t)=\tfrac12\|x(t)-x^*\|^2hx∗​(t)=21​∥x(t)−x∗∥2 measures the distance of the trajectory to x∗x^*x∗, with derivative h˙x∗(t)=⟨x˙(t),x(t)−x∗⟩\dot h_{x^*}(t)=\langle\dot x(t),x(t)-x^*\rangleh˙x∗​(t)=⟨x˙(t),x(t)−x∗⟩.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2 (p. 18)

If ∫t0+∞ϵ(t)t dt=+∞\int_{t_0}^{+\infty}\frac{\epsilon(t)}{t}\,dt=+\infty∫t0​+∞​tϵ(t)​dt=+∞ and α>0\alpha>0α>0, then every global C2C^2C2-solution satisfies

lim⁡t→+∞1∫t0tϵ(s)s ds∫t0tϵ(s)s∥x(s)−x∗∥2 ds=0andlim inf⁡t→+∞∥x(t)−x∗∥=0.\lim_{t\to+\infty}\frac{1}{\int_{t_0}^{t}\frac{\epsilon(s)}{s}\,ds}\int_{t_0}^{t}\frac{\epsilon(s)}{s}\|x(s)-x^*\|^2\,ds=0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad \liminf_{t\to+\infty}\|x(t)-x^*\|=0 .t→+∞lim​∫t0​t​sϵ(s)​ds1​∫t0​t​sϵ(s)​∥x(s)−x∗∥2ds=0andt→+∞liminf​∥x(t)−x∗∥=0.

No rate and no constant is asserted, so the goal does not depend on any particular choice of ϵ\epsilonϵ.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4.1 (p. 16): for α>0\alpha>0α>0, β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0, the velocity is bounded, 1t∥x˙(t)∥2∈L1([t0,+∞))\frac1t\|\dot x(t)\|^2\in L^1([t_0,+\infty))t1​∥x˙(t)∥2∈L1([t0​,+∞)), and sup⁡t≥t01t∣h˙x∗(t)∣<+∞\sup_{t\ge t_0}\frac1t|\dot h_{x^*}(t)|<+\inftysupt≥t0​​t1​∣h˙x∗​(t)∣<+∞ for every x∗∈argmin⁡gx^*\in\operatorname{argmin} gx∗∈argming.
  2. §4, p. 18: ∥xϵ∥≤∥x∗∥\|x_\epsilon\|\le\|x^*\|∥xϵ​∥≤∥x∗∥ for every ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0.
  3. §4, p. 18: lim⁡ϵ→0+xϵ=x∗\lim_{\epsilon\to0^+}x_\epsilon=x^*limϵ→0+​xϵ​=x∗ (stated in the paper as well known).
  4. (46) (p. 20): under the hypotheses of Theorem 4.2 there is C>0C>0C>0 with
∫t0tϵ(s)s(hx∗(s)−12(∥x∗∥2−∥xϵ(s)∥2))ds≤Cfor every t≥t0.\int_{t_0}^{t}\frac{\epsilon(s)}{s}\Big(h_{x^*}(s)-\frac12\big(\|x^*\|^2-\|x_{\epsilon(s)}\|^2\big)\Big)ds\le C\quad\text{for every }t\ge t_0 .∫t0​t​sϵ(s)​(hx∗​(s)−21​(∥x∗∥2−∥xϵ(s)​∥2))ds≤Cfor every t≥t0​.

Significance

The result shows that slow Tikhonov regularization still selects the minimum-norm minimizer when Hessian damping is added: the weighted time average of ∥x(t)−x∗∥2\|x(t)-x^*\|^2∥x(t)−x∗∥2 tends to zero and the trajectory comes arbitrarily close to x∗x^*x∗ infinitely often. The hypothesis is only α>0\alpha>0α>0, well below the threshold α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3 that the paper needs for its fast rates, and no growth condition on ϵ\epsilonϵ beyond the divergence of ∫ϵ(t)/t dt\int\epsilon(t)/t\,dt∫ϵ(t)/tdt is imposed. It complements Theorem 4.4 of the same paper (a separate mission), which reaches full strong convergence under fast decay, ∫ϵ(t)/t dt<+∞\int\epsilon(t)/t\,dt<+\infty∫ϵ(t)/tdt<+∞, plus further conditions.

On the formal side, the theorem and its milestones are proved in the paper and in the cited literature, but none of them has a machine-checked proof. The work splits into an energy estimate for a nonautonomous second order ODE in a Hilbert space (Lemma 4.1), two facts about the Tikhonov curve that underlie the whole theory of Tikhonov regularization of convex problems (milestones 2 and 3), an integrated differential inequality (46), and a l'Hospital-type averaging step. The Tikhonov-curve facts are reusable for any formal treatment of viscosity selection and minimum-norm solutions.

Difficulty

The obvious attempt, a Lyapunov function that decreases along the trajectory and controls ∥x(t)−x∗∥\|x(t)-x^*\|∥x(t)−x∗∥, fails because x∗x^*x∗ is not a stationary point of the perturbed system: ∇g(x∗)+ϵ(t)x∗=ϵ(t)x∗≠0\nabla g(x^*)+\epsilon(t)x^*=\epsilon(t)x^*\neq0∇g(x∗)+ϵ(t)x∗=ϵ(t)x∗=0 in general. The distance to x∗x^*x∗ therefore need not decrease, and pointwise convergence is not available under the slow-decay hypothesis alone. The comparison point has to move along the Tikhonov curve xϵ(t)x_{\epsilon(t)}xϵ(t)​, whose convergence to x∗x^*x∗ comes without a rate. The available bound controls only a weighted integral of hx∗h_{x^*}hx∗​ corrected by ∥x∗∥2−∥xϵ(s)∥2\|x^*\|^2-\|x_{\epsilon(s)}\|^2∥x∗∥2−∥xϵ(s)​∥2, so the passage from (46) to the goal needs both xϵ(t)→x∗x_{\epsilon(t)}\to x^*xϵ(t)​→x∗ and the divergence of the weight. In the formal setting the Tikhonov-curve limit is itself a nontrivial weak-compactness argument in a Hilbert space, which the paper does not spell out.

Formalization scope

  • H\mathcal HH is a real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H). ∇g\nabla g∇g is gradient g, and ∇2g(x)v\nabla^2 g(x)v∇2g(x)v is the Fréchet derivative of gradient g at xxx applied to vvv. "Twice Fréchet differentiable" means ggg and ∇g\nabla g∇g are differentiable; Lipschitz continuity on bounded sets is stated on every closed ball around the origin.
  • Trajectories are maps R→H\mathbb R\to\mathcal HR→H with explicit velocity and acceleration maps; derivatives are taken within [t0,+∞)[t_0,+\infty)[t0​,+∞) (one-sided at t0t_0t0​), the acceleration is continuous there, and values before t0t_0t0​ are irrelevant. The same holds for ϵ\epsilonϵ and its derivative.
  • Every theorem is stated for every global C2C^2C2-solution of (5). Existence and uniqueness of the solution is Theorem 2.1 of the paper, a milestone of the first mission of this series, so the hypothesis is not vacuous. The paper's standing α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3 is replaced by each statement's own hypothesis α>0\alpha>0α>0.
  • The minimum-norm minimizer and the Tikhonov points are predicates on a candidate point; where the curve ϵ↦xϵ\epsilon\mapsto x_\epsilonϵ↦xϵ​ is needed, a selection that minimizes g+ϵ2∥⋅∥2g+\frac\epsilon2\|\cdot\|^2g+2ϵ​∥⋅∥2 for every ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0 is a hypothesis.
  • ∫t0+∞ϵ(t)/t dt=+∞\int_{t_0}^{+\infty}\epsilon(t)/t\,dt=+\infty∫t0​+∞​ϵ(t)/tdt=+∞ is stated as divergence of T↦∫t0Tϵ(t)/t dtT\mapsto\int_{t_0}^T\epsilon(t)/t\,dtT↦∫t0​T​ϵ(t)/tdt, never as an equation for a Bochner integral, which would take the value 000 on a non-integrable function. Likewise, lim inf⁡∥x(t)−x∗∥=0\liminf\|x(t)-x^*\|=0liminf∥x(t)−x∗∥=0 is stated as "for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0, ∥x(t)−x∗∥<δ\|x(t)-x^*\|<\delta∥x(t)−x∗∥<δ for arbitrarily large ttt", not through Filter.liminf, whose value on an unbounded function is a default. sup⁡<+∞\sup<+\inftysup<+∞ is boundedness from above of the image of [t0,+∞)[t_0,+\infty)[t0​,+∞), and L1L^1L1 membership is integrability on [t0,+∞)[t_0,+\infty)[t0​,+∞).
  • Definitions needed: argmin, the minimum-norm minimizer, Tikhonov points, the General assumption, the solution predicate for (5), and hx∗h_{x^*}hx∗​, h˙x∗\dot h_{x^*}h˙x∗​. These duplicate objects of the other two missions of the series, which are drafted independently.
  • Contributions welcome: proofs of the Tikhonov-curve facts in Mathlib generality, the energy estimate of Lemma 4.1, a continuous l'Hospital/Cesàro lemma for weighted averages, and the goal itself.

Selected references

  • R.I. Boţ, E.R. Csetnek, S.C. László, Tikhonov regularization of a second order dynamical system with Hessian driven damping, Mathematical Programming, 2021, https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-020-01528-8 (cited from arXiv:1911.12845v2). https://arxiv.org/abs/1911.12845
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, H. Riahi, Combining fast inertial dynamics for convex optimization with Tikhonov regularization, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 457(2), 1065–1094, 2018. https://arxiv.org/abs/1602.01973
  • H. Attouch, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convex optimization via inertial dynamics with Hessian driven damping, Journal of Differential Equations 261(10), 5734–5783, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1601.07113
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Mathematical Programming 168, 123–175, 2018. https://arxiv.org/abs/1507.04782
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E.J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17(153), 1–43, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Captain: mikedeng1

A Unified Convergence Analysis of Block Successive Minimization Methods for Nonsmooth Optimization III: Every Limit Point of BSCA with Armijo Steps Is a Stationary PointResearch Paper

Motivation

Large optimization models often split their variables into blocks that can be handled separately. A method can then solve one smaller approximation problem per iteration instead of the full problem. The block successive convex approximation (BSCA) method of Razaviyayn, Hong and Luo allows the block approximation to guide the search without requiring it to be a global upper bound on the original objective. This matters when an upper bound is awkward to construct but a locally accurate convex model is available. The question is what such a run can approach: a small objective value by itself does not certify first-order optimality.

The paper develops this result after its successive upper-bound minimization methods. Theorem 4 of the pinned preprint gives the limit-point guarantee for BSCA with an Armijo step search. The mission records that result and the numbered relations (31)–(34) and (39) that organize the argument, using the 2012 preprint as the sole source for statement indices and page numbers.

Setting

The decision vector is a block vector x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\ldots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​), with block xix_ixi​ in a nonempty, closed, convex set Xi⊆RmiX_i\subseteq\mathbb R^{m_i}Xi​⊆Rmi​. The feasible set is X=∏i=1NXiX=\prod_{i=1}^{N}X_iX=∏i=1N​Xi​. A continuously differentiable objective fff assigns each feasible vector a real value. A point z∈Xz\in Xz∈X is stationary when f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 for every direction ddd whose full step z+dz+dz+d lies in XXX. For a smooth objective, f′(z;d)f'(z;d)f′(z;d) is the derivative of fff in direction ddd.

For block iii, the function hi(yi,x)h_i(y_i,x)hi​(yi​,x) approximates the objective as the trial block yiy_iyi​ varies around a current point xxx. Its directional derivative at yi=xiy_i=x_iyi​=xi​ agrees with the objective derivative in the corresponding one-block direction, as in equation (30). Each hi(⋅,x)h_i(\cdot,x)hi​(⋅,x) is strictly convex on XiX_iXi​, and hih_ihi​ varies continuously with its trial block and feasible base point. Strict convexity is a condition in the trial block for each fixed xxx; it does not say that hih_ihi​ is jointly convex in both arguments.

At iteration rrr, a cyclic schedule chooses one block iii. A minimizer yiry_i^ryir​ of hi(⋅,xr)h_i(\cdot,x^r)hi​(⋅,xr) over XiX_iXi​ replaces that block in yry^ryr; all other blocks of yry^ryr equal those of xrx^rxr. The search direction is dr=yr−xrd^r=y^r-x^rdr=yr−xr. With σ,β∈(0,1)\sigma,\beta\in(0,1)σ,β∈(0,1) and an initial trial length αinit>0\alpha^{\rm init}>0αinit>0, the Armijo rule chooses the largest member αr\alpha^rαr of {αinitβj:j=0,1,…}\{\alpha^{\rm init}\beta^j:j=0,1,\ldots\}{αinitβj:j=0,1,…} satisfying

f(xr)−f(xr+αrdr)≥−σαrf′(xr;dr),f(x^r)-f(x^r+\alpha^r d^r)\ge-\sigma\alpha^r f'(x^r;d^r),f(xr)−f(xr+αrdr)≥−σαrf′(xr;dr),

then sets xr+1=xr+αrdrx^{r+1}=x^r+\alpha^r d^rxr+1=xr+αrdr. The selected minimizer can be any one of the block minimizers; the definition does not prescribe a hidden tie-breaking rule.

Formalization targets

The first targets identify descent and line-search existence. Equation (31) says the chosen block direction has a nonpositive derivative. Equation (32) says a strict descent direction admits a trial index. The later milestones state the vanishing scaled derivative (33), a subsequence with vanishing search directions (34), and limiting block optimality following (39).

The goal is Theorem 4: for every limit point zzz of the sequence generated by cyclic BSCA,

z∈X,f′(z;d)≥0for every d with z+d∈X.z\in X,\qquad f'(z;d)\ge0\quad\text{for every }d\text{ with }z+d\in X.z∈X,f′(z;d)≥0for every d with z+d∈X.

This is a limit-point assertion. It does not assert convergence of the entire iterate sequence, a convergence rate, or global optimality of a stationary point.

Significance

Theorem 4 identifies what an accumulation point of BSCA must satisfy even though its block models need only local first-order agreement rather than global upper bounds. In a nonconvex problem, stationarity is a meaningful first-order conclusion but need not be a global minimum. The exact role of the step search is important: accepting some Armijo step gives decrease, whereas the theorem's limit-point claim uses the largest acceptable member of the geometric trial sequence.

This mission asks solvers to supply machine-checked proofs for a known paper theorem and its stated supporting relations. The draft statements compile as open theorems; they are not proofs. The reusable output includes a block run predicate, an explicit first-order agreement predicate, and a bridge between feasible-direction stationarity and an extended-real objective on the full block space. These objects also make subsequent variants of cyclic block methods easier to state precisely.

Difficulty

A simple decrease argument shows that objective values do not increase, but the accepted step sizes may approach zero. Therefore decrease alone does not imply dr→0d^r\to0dr→0 or that a limit point minimizes every block model. The paper's key limit statement singles out a convergent subsequence on which a fixed block is updated and finds a further subsequence with vanishing directions. Passing block optimality to the limit then requires continuity of the approximation and feasible limit points. The cyclic schedule is needed to cover all blocks, while first-order agreement turns block optimality into stationarity for the original smooth objective.

Formalization scope

Lean uses the published TsengBCD.Stationary.X for the finite product of Euclidean block spaces, its extended-real lower directional derivative, and its stationary-point predicate. The product has the sup norm rather than the paper's Euclidean product norm; in finite dimension the notions of convergence used here agree. Blocks and iterations are indexed from zero. The paper's cyclic choice i=(r mod N)+1i=(r\bmod N)+1i=(rmodN)+1 is reindexed so the step from xrx^rxr to xr+1x^{r+1}xr+1 updates block r mod Nr\bmod NrmodN. The existence of the schedule already rules out zero blocks.

The objective is a real function on the full block space, with ContDiff ℝ 1 expressing the paper's continuous differentiability. This makes the Fréchet derivative used in the Armijo test equal to the paper's lower directional derivative at the points in question. For stationarity, the objective is extended by +∞+\infty+∞ outside XXX, so infeasible directions cannot silently become admissible. The approximation derivative remains extended-real because the paper assumes only convexity for that function. ContinuousOn is taken on the product of a feasible trial block and a feasible base point.

Two points are explicit in the formalization. First, 0<αinit≤10<\alpha^{\rm init}\le10<αinit≤1 ensures that a convex combination of xrx^rxr and yry^ryr stays in XXX; the paper prints only positivity. Whether Theorem 4 holds without this restriction under a different global interpretation of fff and hih_ihi​ remains a separate question. Second, Figure 4 mixes rrr and r−1r-1r−1 in the approximation, direction, and update lines. The run follows the adjacent prose and proof, all of which construct the direction at the current iterate. For (33), the existence of a limit point makes explicit the proof's standing situation and gives the decreasing objective a finite limit. An arbitrary unrelated sequence, an Armijo step that is not the largest accepted trial, or an objective extension that gives a default zero derivative off XXX is outside this scope.

The remaining proof work includes feasibility of every iterate, first-order agreement along the selected block, the Armijo existence statement, the subsequence claim, passage of block minimization to the limit, and the final stationary-point equivalence. The finite-dimensional convex analysis and topology involved are reusable beyond this one algorithm.

Selected references

  • M. Razaviyayn, M. Hong and Z.-Q. Luo, A Unified Convergence Analysis of Block Successive Minimization Methods for Nonsmooth Optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 23(2), 2013, 1126–1153. arXiv:1209.2385v1; DOI:10.1137/120891009.
  • P. Tseng, Convergence of a Block Coordinate Descent Method for Nondifferentiable Minimization, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 109(3), 2001, 475–494. DOI:10.1023/A:1017501703105.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Convergence and Dynamical Behavior of the ADAM Algorithm for Nonconvex Stochastic Optimization 6: Decreasing-Step Adam Iterates Are Almost Surely BoundedResearch Paper

Motivation

Adam (Kingma and Ba, arXiv:1412.6980) is the default optimizer for training neural networks. It combines a stochastic gradient step with two exponential moving averages: a momentum term mnm_nmn​ and a coordinatewise second-moment estimate vnv_nvn​ that rescales each coordinate of the step. Its convergence theory is delicate: Reddi, Kale and Kumar (arXiv:1904.09237) exhibited convex problems on which Adam with constant hyperparameters fails to converge.

Barakat and Bianchi (arXiv:1810.02263, SIAM J. Math. Data Sci. 3(1), 2021) study Adam on nonconvex objectives through the ODE method of stochastic approximation. In the decreasing-stepsize regime, their Theorem 5.2 proves that the iterates converge almost surely to the critical points of the objective — provided the iterates are almost surely bounded. A stability hypothesis of this kind is standard in stochastic approximation (Benaïm, Dynamics of stochastic approximation algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, 1999, doi:10.1007/BFb0096509), and it is often the hardest part to verify. Theorem 5.4 of the paper gives sufficient conditions, on the objective and the stepsizes only, under which almost sure boundedness holds. This mission formalizes that theorem.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,\mathbb P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and (Ξ,S)(\Xi,\mathfrak S)(Ξ,S) a measurable space carrying a probability measure μ\muμ. A loss f:Rd×Ξ→Rf:\mathbb R^d\times\Xi\to\mathbb Rf:Rd×Ξ→R is given, with gradient ∇f(x,ξ)\nabla f(x,\xi)∇f(x,ξ) in xxx, and the objective is

F(x)=Ef(x,ξ)=∫Ξf(x,ξ) μ(dξ).F(x)=\mathbb E f(x,\xi)=\int_\Xi f(x,\xi)\,\mu(d\xi).F(x)=Ef(x,ξ)=∫Ξ​f(x,ξ)μ(dξ).

The samples (ξn)n≥1(\xi_n)_{n\ge1}(ξn​)n≥1​ are iid with law μ\muμ (Assumption 4.1). Vector operations below are coordinatewise.

Fix ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and real sequences (γn)(\gamma_n)(γn​) (stepsizes), (αn)(\alpha_n)(αn​), (βn)(\beta_n)(βn​) (moment parameters). Algorithm 5.1 (Adam with decreasing stepsize) starts from x0∈Rdx_0\in\mathbb R^dx0​∈Rd, m0=v0=0m_0=v_0=0m0​=v0​=0, r0=rˉ0=0r_0=\bar r_0=0r0​=rˉ0​=0, and for n≥1n\ge1n≥1 sets

mn=αnmn−1+(1−αn)∇f(xn−1,ξn),rn=αnrn−1+(1−αn),vn=βnvn−1+(1−βn)∇f(xn−1,ξn)⊙2,rˉn=βnrˉn−1+(1−βn),xn=xn−1−γn m^n/(ε+v^n),m^n=mn/rn,v^n=vn/rˉn.\begin{aligned} m_n&=\alpha_nm_{n-1}+(1-\alpha_n)\nabla f(x_{n-1},\xi_n), & r_n&=\alpha_nr_{n-1}+(1-\alpha_n),\\ v_n&=\beta_nv_{n-1}+(1-\beta_n)\nabla f(x_{n-1},\xi_n)^{\odot2}, & \bar r_n&=\beta_n\bar r_{n-1}+(1-\beta_n),\\ x_n&=x_{n-1}-\gamma_n\,\hat m_n/(\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n}), & \hat m_n&=m_n/r_n,\quad \hat v_n=v_n/\bar r_n . \end{aligned}mn​vn​xn​​=αn​mn−1​+(1−αn​)∇f(xn−1​,ξn​),=βn​vn−1​+(1−βn​)∇f(xn−1​,ξn​)⊙2,=xn−1​−γn​m^n​/(ε+v^n​​),​rn​rˉn​m^n​​=αn​rn−1​+(1−αn​),=βn​rˉn−1​+(1−βn​),=mn​/rn​,v^n​=vn​/rˉn​.​

The weights rn,rˉnr_n,\bar r_nrn​,rˉn​ implement the bias correction of Adam.

The hypotheses are: Assumption 2.2 (f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) measurable, f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot,\xi)f(⋅,ξ) continuously differentiable for a.e. ξ\xiξ, integrability at one point, and E∥∇f(x,ξ)−∇f(y,ξ)∥2≤LK2∥x−y∥2\mathbb E\|\nabla f(x,\xi)-\nabla f(y,\xi)\|^2\le L_K^2\|x-y\|^2E∥∇f(x,ξ)−∇f(y,ξ)∥2≤LK2​∥x−y∥2 on each compact KKK); Assumption 2.3 (FFF coercive); Assumption 4.2 i) with p=4p=4p=4 (sup⁡x∈KE∥∇f(x,ξ)∥4<∞\sup_{x\in K}\mathbb E\|\nabla f(x,\xi)\|^4<\inftysupx∈K​E∥∇f(x,ξ)∥4<∞ on compacts); Assumption 5.1 (γn>0\gamma_n>0γn​>0, γn+1/γn→1\gamma_{n+1}/\gamma_n\to1γn+1​/γn​→1, ∑γn=∞\sum\gamma_n=\infty∑γn​=∞, ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞, αn,βn∈[0,1]\alpha_n,\beta_n\in[0,1]αn​,βn​∈[0,1], (1−αn)/γn→a(1-\alpha_n)/\gamma_n\to a(1−αn​)/γn​→a, (1−βn)/γn→b(1-\beta_n)/\gamma_n\to b(1−βn​)/γn​→b with 0<b<4a0<b<4a0<b<4a); and Assumption 5.3 (∇F\nabla F∇F Lipschitz, E∥∇f(x,ξ)∥2≤C(1+F(x))\mathbb E\|\nabla f(x,\xi)\|^2\le C(1+F(x))E∥∇f(x,ξ)∥2≤C(1+F(x)), and lim sup⁡n(γn−1−1−αn+21−αn+1γn+1−1)<2(a−b/4)\limsup_n\big(\gamma_n^{-1}-\frac{1-\alpha_{n+2}}{1-\alpha_{n+1}}\gamma_{n+1}^{-1}\big)<2(a-b/4)limsupn​(γn−1​−1−αn+1​1−αn+2​​γn+1−1​)<2(a−b/4)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.4

Under Assumptions 2.2, 2.3, 4.1, 5.1, 5.3 and 4.2 i) with p=4p=4p=4,

P(sup⁡n∈N∥(xn,mn,vn)∥<∞)=1.\mathbb P\Big(\sup_{n\in\mathbb N}\|(x_n,m_n,v_n)\|<\infty\Big)=1 .P(n∈Nsup​∥(xn​,mn​,vn​)∥<∞)=1.

Milestones (in the order the proof of §9.2 uses them)

  1. Lemma 9.1 i)–ii): rn=1−∏i=1nαir_n=1-\prod_{i=1}^n\alpha_irn​=1−∏i=1n​αi​, and (rn)(r_n)(rn​) is nondecreasing with rn→1r_n\to1rn​→1; likewise for rˉn\bar r_nrˉn​.
  2. (9.1): with an=(1−αn+1)/γna_n=(1-\alpha_{n+1})/\gamma_nan​=(1−αn+1​)/γn​ and Pn=12anrn⟨mn⊙2,1/(ε+v^n)⟩P_n=\frac1{2a_nr_n}\langle m_n^{\odot2},1/(\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n})\ranglePn​=2an​rn​1​⟨mn⊙2​,1/(ε+v^n​​)⟩,
F(xn)≤F(xn−1)−γn⟨∇F(xn),m^nε+v^n⟩+Cγn2Pn.F(x_n)\le F(x_{n-1})-\gamma_n\Big\langle\nabla F(x_n),\frac{\hat m_n}{\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n}}\Big\rangle+C\gamma_n^2P_n .F(xn​)≤F(xn−1​)−γn​⟨∇F(xn​),ε+v^n​​m^n​​⟩+Cγn2​Pn​.
  1. (9.3): coordinatewise, v^n−v^n+1≤cn+1v^n+1\sqrt{\hat v_n}-\sqrt{\hat v_{n+1}}\le c_{n+1}\sqrt{\hat v_{n+1}}v^n​​−v^n+1​​≤cn+1​v^n+1​​ with an explicit cn+1∼bγn/2c_{n+1}\sim b\gamma_n/2cn+1​∼bγn​/2.
  2. (9.4): with un=1−an+1/anu_n=1-a_{n+1}/a_nun​=1−an+1​/an​, for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and nnn large,
En(F(xn)+Pn+1)≤F(xn−1)+Pn+unEnPn+1−2(a−b+δ4)γnPn+Cγn2(1+F(xn)+Pn).\mathbb E_n\big(F(x_n)+P_{n+1}\big)\le F(x_{n-1})+P_n+u_n\mathbb E_nP_{n+1}-2\Big(a-\frac{b+\delta}4\Big)\gamma_nP_n+C\gamma_n^2\big(1+F(x_n)+P_n\big).En​(F(xn​)+Pn+1​)≤F(xn−1​)+Pn​+un​En​Pn+1​−2(a−4b+δ​)γn​Pn​+Cγn2​(1+F(xn​)+Pn​).
  1. The Robbins–Siegmund inequality: Vn=(1−Cγn−12)F(xn−1)+(1−un−1)PnV_n=(1-C\gamma_{n-1}^2)F(x_{n-1})+(1-u_{n-1})P_nVn​=(1−Cγn−12​)F(xn−1​)+(1−un−1​)Pn​ satisfies En(Vn+1)≤(1+C′γn2)Vn+Cγn2\mathbb E_n(V_{n+1})\le(1+C'\gamma_n^2)V_n+C\gamma_n^2En​(Vn+1​)≤(1+C′γn2​)Vn​+Cγn2​ for nnn large.

Significance

Theorem 5.2 of the paper, the almost sure convergence of decreasing-step Adam to the critical set, is conditional on almost sure boundedness. Theorem 5.4 removes that condition for objectives with Lipschitz gradient and quadratic gradient-noise growth, and so turns Theorem 5.2 into an unconditional convergence result in that class. The Lyapunov function F(xn−1)+PnF(x_{n-1})+P_nF(xn−1​)+Pn​ — the objective plus a weighted kinetic energy of the momentum — is the discrete counterpart of the energy used for the continuous-time Adam ODE in the same paper; the condition b<4ab<4ab<4a that keeps it decreasing is the discrete trace of the condition b≤4ab\le4ab≤4a of the ODE analysis.

The result is proved in the paper; nothing about Adam is formalized on the platform. A formal proof produces a machine-checked stability theorem for an adaptive, momentum-based stochastic algorithm, together with reusable pieces: the Robbins–Siegmund almost-supermartingale theorem in the conditional-expectation form used here, and the bias-correction lemma, which applies to every exponential moving average with vanishing forgetting rate.

Difficulty

For plain stochastic gradient descent, boundedness follows from the descent lemma applied to FFF alone: F(xn)F(x_n)F(xn​) is an almost supermartingale. For Adam this fails. The step m^n/(ε+v^n)\hat m_n/(\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n})m^n​/(ε+v^n​​) is not a descent direction for FFF: mnm_nmn​ averages past gradients, so ⟨∇F(xn),m^n/(ε+v^n)⟩\langle\nabla F(x_n),\hat m_n/(\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n})\rangle⟨∇F(xn​),m^n​/(ε+v^n​​)⟩ has no sign. The momentum must therefore enter the Lyapunov function, through PnP_nPn​, and the coordinatewise preconditioner 1/(ε+v^n)1/(\varepsilon+\sqrt{\hat v_n})1/(ε+v^n​​) changes from step to step, so Pn+1P_{n+1}Pn+1​ and PnP_nPn​ are measured in different weighted norms. Controlling that change is what (9.3) does, and it costs a term of size b2γnPn\frac b2\gamma_nP_n2b​γn​Pn​ that must be absorbed by the friction 2aγnPn2a\gamma_nP_n2aγn​Pn​ of the momentum update; the margin is exactly b<4ab<4ab<4a. The time-varying weights ana_nan​ and rnr_nrn​ produce the further term unPn+1u_nP_{n+1}un​Pn+1​, which is why Assumption 5.3 iii) is needed. Finally, the conditional expectations involve the next sample through both mn+1m_{n+1}mn+1​ and v^n+1\hat v_{n+1}v^n+1​, so the second-moment growth condition of Assumption 5.3 ii) has to be used with the right weights.

Formalization scope

Points of Rd\mathbb R^dRd are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); the state (x,m,v)(x,m,v)(x,m,v) lives in the product E×E×EE\times E\times EE×E×E, whose Mathlib norm is the maximum of the three Euclidean norms (the same bounded sets). The gradient of fff is a function gf : E → Ξ → E that equals the true gradient for μ\muμ-almost every ξ\xiξ. The run of Algorithm 5.1 is defined along a sample path and then pathwise in ω\omegaω. Moments are lower Lebesgue integrals, so no hypothesis is vacuous through the convention that a non-integrable Bochner integral is 000. Assumption 5.3 iii) is stated as "there is c<2(a−b/4)c<2(a-b/4)c<2(a−b/4) bounding the bracket for all large nnn", which avoids a real limsup. The algorithm divides by rnr_nrn​ and rˉn\bar r_nrˉn​; the theorem therefore assumes α1<1\alpha_1<1α1​<1 and β1<1\beta_1<1β1​<1, which Algorithm 5.1 needs for m^1,v^1\hat m_1,\hat v_1m^1​,v^1​ to be defined. In the milestones, En\mathbb E_nEn​ applied to a function of the next state is the integral of that function over the next sample, ∫G(Tn+1(zn,ξ)) μ(dξ)\int G(T_{n+1}(z_n,\xi))\,\mu(d\xi)∫G(Tn+1​(zn​,ξ))μ(dξ), a version of the conditional expectation under Assumption 4.1. In (9.4) the term printed as unPn+1u_nP_{n+1}un​Pn+1​ is unEnPn+1u_n\mathbb E_nP_{n+1}un​En​Pn+1​, the reading the derivation produces.

The goal asserts a single bound for the whole trajectory almost surely; finiteness of each iterate, boundedness of a projected variant of Adam, and boundedness under an almost-sure bound on ∇f(x,ξ)\nabla f(x,\xi)∇f(x,ξ) are all weaker statements and are not this theorem. The "without loss of generality F≥0F\ge0F≥0" of the proof appears only as a hypothesis of the last milestone.

A complete development needs the Robbins–Siegmund theorem (open on the platform as AdaptiveProtection.Convergence.lemma2_robbins_siegmund), differentiation under the integral sign for FFF, the descent lemma for Lipschitz gradients, and conditional expectations given σ(ξ1,…,ξn)\sigma(\xi_1,\dots,\xi_n)σ(ξ1​,…,ξn​) for functions of an independent sample. Proofs of any milestone, and a proof of Robbins–Siegmund in the form used here, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Barakat, P. Bianchi, Convergence and Dynamical Behavior of the ADAM Algorithm for Nonconvex Stochastic Optimization, SIAM J. Math. Data Sci. 3(1), 2021; arXiv:1810.02263v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1810.02263
  • D. P. Kingma, J. Ba, Adam: A Method for Stochastic Optimization, ICLR 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1412.6980
  • S. J. Reddi, S. Kale, S. Kumar, On the Convergence of Adam and Beyond, ICLR 2018. https://arxiv.org/abs/1904.09237
  • H. Robbins, D. Siegmund, A convergence theorem for non negative almost supermartingales and some applications, in Optimizing Methods in Statistics, Academic Press, 1971. https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-604550-5.50015-8
  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of stochastic approximation algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, LNM 1709, Springer, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment III: With a Fixed Cost of Quality, the Encroaching Manufacturer Does Not Differentiate Quality Across ChannelsResearch Paper

Why channel quality matters

A manufacturer that sells through a retailer can also open a direct sales channel. The direct channel lets the manufacturer reach consumers, but it competes with the retailer, whose orders generate wholesale revenue. The manufacturer can further choose whether the two channels carry products of the same quality. These decisions interact because quality changes both consumer demand and the retailer's response. Ha, Long and Nasiry study this interaction in a sequential supply-chain game. Their fixed-quality-cost extension asks what happens when a high-quality design can be converted into a lower-quality variant without paying a separate production cost for each unit (Ha, Long and Nasiry, §6.2).

The main result is specific to this cost regime. With a cost per unit that rises with quality, different products can be attractive across the channels; with the paper's one-time cost of creating quality, Proposition 6(i) asserts equal qualities when the direct channel makes positive sales. This mission targets that fixed-cost proposition in the authors' manuscript, including its game and the reduced-profit claims used in the e-Companion (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 20, 36–37).

The sequential market

The market has mass one of consumers, indexed by a taste for quality θ\thetaθ uniformly distributed on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. A consumer buying a product of quality v>0v>0v>0 at price ppp receives surplus θv−p\theta v-pθv−p. The manufacturer offers quality u>0u>0u>0 through her own direct channel and quality tu>0tu>0tu>0 through the retailer. The ratio ttt therefore records which channel has higher quality. The manufacturer pays a fixed cost of quality max⁡{ku2,k(tu)2}\max\{ku^2,k(tu)^2\}max{ku2,k(tu)2}, with k>0k>0k>0, and a direct selling cost c≥0c\ge0c≥0 per unit. The retailer has zero selling cost. Unlike a unit production cost, this fixed cost is paid once and does not scale with either channel's quantity (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 7–8, 20).

The manufacturer first chooses wholesale price www and qualities u,tuu,tuu,tu. After observing them, the retailer chooses its order qR≥0q_R\ge0qR​≥0. The manufacturer observes that order and chooses her direct quantity qM≥0q_M\ge0qM​≥0. When 0<t≤10<t\le10<t≤1, market-clearing prices are

pM=u(1−qM−tqR),pR=tu(1−qM−qR).p_M=u(1-q_M-tq_R),\qquad p_R=tu(1-q_M-q_R).pM​=u(1−qM​−tqR​),pR​=tu(1−qM​−qR​).

When t≥1t\ge1t≥1, the retailer's product has higher quality, and the corresponding prices are

pM=u(1−qM−qR),pR=tu(1−qR)−uqM.p_M=u(1-q_M-q_R),\qquad p_R=tu(1-q_R)-uq_M.pM​=u(1−qM​−qR​),pR​=tu(1−qR​)−uqM​.

The manufacturer receives wholesale revenue plus direct-channel revenue, less the direct selling cost and fixed quality cost. The retailer receives its retail margin times qRq_RqR​. Encroachment means qM>0q_M>0qM​>0 on the equilibrium path, rather than the mere existence of a direct channel (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 8, 11, 15, 36).

Formalization targets

Equal quality under encroachment

For a subgame-perfect equilibrium σ\sigmaσ of the fixed-cost game, the goal is Proposition 6(i):

qM(σ)>0⟹t(σ)=1.q_M(\sigma)>0\quad\Longrightarrow\quad t(\sigma)=1.qM​(σ)>0⟹t(σ)=1.

The formal statement assumes c>0c>0c>0. At c=0c=0c=0, the high-direct-quality reduced profit is independent of ttt, so the printed claim fails to force t=1t=1t=1; this is a substantive qualification of the manuscript's standing c≥0c\ge0c≥0 convention. The goal concerns the complete game, with contingent actions at every decision node, rather than only the closed-form optimization problem (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 20, 36).

Subgame and optimization claims

The milestone list follows the authors' two quality regimes. The e-Companion gives best responses, wholesale prices, and reduced profits in each regime. In the high-direct-quality regime, Claim 3 concludes that an optimum with positive direct sales has t=1t=1t=1. In the low-direct-quality regime, Lemma 2 concludes that an optimum either has t=1t=1t=1 or lies at no encroachment. The latter alternative is outside the strict encroachment-feasible set used by the Lean milestone. Footnote 2 supplies a one-variable sign inequality used in the analysis of that regime (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 36–37).

What the result gives

Proposition 6(i) determines the manufacturer's quality choice conditional on active direct sales: both channels carry quality uuu. It narrows the set of equilibrium outcomes that the fixed-cost model can support and distinguishes the role of a one-time design cost from the paper's earlier variable-cost model. The paper states a separate profit comparison in Proposition 6(ii); this mission does not formalize it because the e-Companion omits its proof and the fixed-cost no-encroachment benchmark for that comparison is not stated (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 20, 37).

A complete Lean development would connect the reduced-profit calculations on page 36 to subgame-perfect play in the three-stage game, and establish the optimization claims over their stated feasible sets. The definitions of two-quality inverse demand, contingent strategies, and nodewise optimality are reusable for related channel games. The goal and milestones here are draft statements, without machine-checked proofs of their economic conclusions.

Central difficulty

The manufacturer chooses quality and wholesale price before the retailer's order, yet the direct quantity is chosen only after that order. Consequently, the retailer's payoff depends on the manufacturer's continuation response, and the first-stage choice must account for both later decisions. The reduced profit also changes at t=1t=1t=1, where the higher-quality channel switches. A calculation for one regime alone does not establish the full-game claim. The strict qM>0q_M>0qM​>0 region matters: its boundary represents no encroachment and supports a different alternative in Lemma 2 (Ha, Long and Nasiry, p. 36).

Formalization scope

Lean uses real wholesale prices and qualities, positive uuu and ttt, and nonnegative quantities. Wholesale price has no sign restriction in the manuscript. The market has unit size and the retailer's selling cost is zero. The two inverse-demand expressions are applied to all nonnegative quantities, following the paper's algebraic game model. A profile contains a stage-one action, a retailer order rule for every observed (w,u,t)(w,u,t)(w,u,t), and a direct-quantity rule for every observed (w,u,t,qR)(w,u,t,q_R)(w,u,t,qR​). Subgame perfection requires feasible best replies at every such history, including histories off the equilibrium path. Fixed cost is max⁡{ku2,k(tu)2}\max\{ku^2,k(tu)^2\}max{ku2,k(tu)2}, paid once, while cqMcq_McqM​ is a per-unit selling cost.

The reduced profits ΠHi\Pi_{\mathrm{Hi}}ΠHi​ and ΠLo\Pi_{\mathrm{Lo}}ΠLo​ are used only on their respective open encroachment-feasible domains, where the displayed denominators are positive. Claim 3 is stated for a joint maximizer in (t,u)(t,u)(t,u); keeping uuu fixed while moving to t=1t=1t=1 can leave that feasible set. Lemma 2 excludes the no-encroachment boundary in its Lean statement. Neither reduced profit replaces the full-game payoff in the goal. Contributions that connect the subgame formulas to arbitrary equilibrium profiles, prove the sign inequality, or establish the two optimization results are within scope (Ha, Long and Nasiry, pp. 36–37).

Selected references

  • A. Ha, X. Long and J. Nasiry, Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment, authors' manuscript, SSRN 3970373, published in Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 18(2), 2016. Manuscript. Journal DOI.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Error Bounds, Quadratic Growth, and Linear Convergence of Proximal Methods IV: For Prox-Regular Compositions h∘c, Subregularity of the Subdifferential and of the Prox-Gradient Map CoincideResearch Paper

Motivation

Linear convergence of first-order methods is usually proved through an error bound: near a solution, the distance to the solution set is controlled by the size of a computable residual, such as the length of a proximal-gradient step. For the prox-linear method, which minimizes a composition h(c(x))h(c(x))h(c(x)) of a nonsmooth outer function hhh with a smooth map ccc by repeatedly solving the subproblem obtained from linearizing ccc, Drusvyatskiy and Lewis showed in §5 of their paper (arXiv:1602.06661, Theorem 5.10) that the error bound is equivalent to subregularity of the subdifferential ∂φ\partial\varphi∂φ, a property of the objective alone and closely tied to quadratic growth. That result needs hhh convex and finite-valued.

Many composite models violate both assumptions: constraints enter as indicator functions (h=+∞h=+\inftyh=+∞ off a set), and outer functions such as truncated or concave-composite penalties are nonconvex. §8 of the paper extends the equivalence to closed, extended-real-valued, prox-regular hhh. This mission formalizes that extension (Theorem 8.11) together with the results of §8 its proof rests on.

Setting

Fix a C1C^1C1-smooth map c:Rn→Rmc:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^mc:Rn→Rm and a closed (lower semicontinuous) function h:Rm→R‾=R∪{±∞}h:\mathbb R^m\to\overline{\mathbb R}=\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}h:Rm→R=R∪{±∞}, and consider

min⁡x φ(x)=h(c(x)).(8.2)\min_x\ \varphi(x)=h(c(x)).\qquad(8.2)xmin​ φ(x)=h(c(x)).(8.2)

The linearized function is φ(x;y)=h(c(x)+∇c(x)(y−x))\varphi(x;y)=h\big(c(x)+\nabla c(x)(y-x)\big)φ(x;y)=h(c(x)+∇c(x)(y−x)) and, for t>0t>0t>0, φt(x;y)=φ(x;y)+12t∥x−y∥2\varphi_t(x;y)=\varphi(x;y)+\frac1{2t}\|x-y\|^2φt​(x;y)=φ(x;y)+2t1​∥x−y∥2.

Subgradients are built in three layers (Definition 8.1). A vector vvv is a proximal subgradient of fff at xˉ\bar xxˉ (f(xˉ)f(\bar x)f(xˉ) finite) if f(x)≥f(xˉ)+⟨v,x−xˉ⟩−r2∥x−xˉ∥2f(x)\ge f(\bar x)+\langle v,x-\bar x\rangle-\frac r2\|x-\bar x\|^2f(x)≥f(xˉ)+⟨v,x−xˉ⟩−2r​∥x−xˉ∥2 for some r>0r>0r>0 and all xxx near xˉ\bar xxˉ. The limiting subdifferential ∂f(xˉ)\partial f(\bar x)∂f(xˉ) collects limits of proximal subgradients vi∈∂pf(xi)v_i\in\partial_pf(x_i)vi​∈∂p​f(xi​) with (xi,f(xi),vi)→(xˉ,f(xˉ),v)(x_i,f(x_i),v_i)\to(\bar x,f(\bar x),v)(xi​,f(xi​),vi​)→(xˉ,f(xˉ),v); xˉ\bar xxˉ is stationary if 0∈∂f(xˉ)0\in\partial f(\bar x)0∈∂f(xˉ). The horizon subdifferential ∂∞f(xˉ)\partial^\infty f(\bar x)∂∞f(xˉ) collects limits of tivit_iv_iti​vi​ with vi∈∂f(xi)v_i\in\partial f(x_i)vi​∈∂f(xi​), ti↘0t_i\searrow0ti​↘0, (xi,f(xi))→(xˉ,f(xˉ))(x_i,f(x_i))\to(\bar x,f(\bar x))(xi​,f(xi​))→(xˉ,f(xˉ)).

The map ccc is transverse to hhh at xˉ\bar xxˉ, written c⋔xˉhc\pitchfork_{\bar x}hc⋔xˉ​h, if ∂∞h(c(xˉ))∩Null⁡(∇c(xˉ)∗)={0}\partial^\infty h(c(\bar x))\cap\operatorname{Null}(\nabla c(\bar x)^*)=\{0\}∂∞h(c(xˉ))∩Null(∇c(xˉ)∗)={0} (8.3). The stationary point map St(x)\mathcal S_t(x)St​(x) is the set of stationary points of φt(x;⋅)\varphi_t(x;\cdot)φt​(x;⋅), and the prox-gradient mapping is Gt(x)=t−1(x−St(x))\mathcal G_t(x)=t^{-1}(x-\mathcal S_t(x))Gt​(x)=t−1(x−St​(x)); both are set-valued.

A set-valued map FFF is subregular at (xˉ,yˉ)∈gph⁡F(\bar x,\bar y)\in\operatorname{gph}F(xˉ,yˉ​)∈gphF with constant l>0l>0l>0 if dist⁡(x;F−1(yˉ))≤ldist⁡(yˉ;F(x))\operatorname{dist}(x;F^{-1}(\bar y))\le l\operatorname{dist}(\bar y;F(x))dist(x;F−1(yˉ​))≤ldist(yˉ​;F(x)) for xxx near xˉ\bar xxˉ (Definition 5.7), and metrically regular around (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x,\bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​) if the same holds with yˉ\bar yyˉ​ replaced by every yyy near yˉ\bar yyˉ​ (Definition 8.3). A closed fff is prox-regular at xˉ\bar xxˉ for vˉ∈∂f(xˉ)\bar v\in\partial f(\bar x)vˉ∈∂f(xˉ) if the quadratic minorant f(y)≥f(x)+⟨v,y−x⟩−r2∥y−x∥2f(y)\ge f(x)+\langle v,y-x\rangle-\frac r2\|y-x\|^2f(y)≥f(x)+⟨v,y−x⟩−2r​∥y−x∥2 holds uniformly for x,yx,yx,y near xˉ\bar xxˉ with f(x)f(x)f(x) near f(xˉ)f(\bar x)f(xˉ) and v∈∂f(x)v\in\partial f(x)v∈∂f(x) near vˉ\bar vvˉ (Definition 8.7). Finally, a φ\varphiφ-attentive localization of ∂φ\partial\varphi∂φ around (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0) is a map WWW agreeing with ∂φ(x)\partial\varphi(x)∂φ(x) near 000 whenever xxx is near xˉ\bar xxˉ and φ(x)\varphi(x)φ(x) is near φ(xˉ)\varphi(\bar x)φ(xˉ); a φ(⋅,⋅)\varphi(\cdot,\cdot)φ(⋅,⋅)-attentive localization of St\mathcal S_tSt​ agrees with St(x)\mathcal S_t(x)St​(x) at points yyy near xˉ\bar xxˉ with φ(x;y)\varphi(x;y)φ(x;y) near φ(xˉ)\varphi(\bar x)φ(xˉ), and one of Gt\mathcal G_tGt​ has the form t−1(I−W^)t^{-1}(I-\widehat W)t−1(I−W) with W^\widehat WW such a localization of St\mathcal S_tSt​ (Definition 8.10).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.11 (p. 31)

Assume c⋔xˉhc\pitchfork_{\bar x}hc⋔xˉ​h, 0∈∂φ(xˉ)0\in\partial\varphi(\bar x)0∈∂φ(xˉ), ∇c\nabla c∇c Lipschitz around xˉ\bar xxˉ, and hhh prox-regular at c(xˉ)c(\bar x)c(xˉ) for every w∈∂h(c(xˉ))w\in\partial h(c(\bar x))w∈∂h(c(xˉ)) with ∇c(xˉ)∗w=0\nabla c(\bar x)^*w=0∇c(xˉ)∗w=0. Let (i) be "some φ\varphiφ-attentive localization of ∂φ\partial\varphi∂φ is subregular at (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0)" and (ii) "some φ(⋅,⋅)\varphi(\cdot,\cdot)φ(⋅,⋅)-attentive localization of Gt\mathcal G_tGt​ is subregular at (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0)". Then

(i)⇒(ii) for all t>0,∃ tˉ>0: (ii)⇒(i) for all t∈(0,tˉ),\text{(i)}\Rightarrow\text{(ii) for all }t>0,\qquad \exists\,\bar t>0:\ \text{(ii)}\Rightarrow\text{(i) for all }t\in(0,\bar t),(i)⇒(ii) for all t>0,∃tˉ>0: (ii)⇒(i) for all t∈(0,tˉ),

and, when hhh is convex, ∂φ\partial\varphi∂φ is subregular at (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0) if and only if Gt\mathcal G_tGt​ is, for every t>0t>0t>0. The constants of subregularity are left existential: the goal asserts the shape of the equivalence, not a particular constant.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 8.4 (p. 26): metric regularity of a closed set-valued map is preserved, with uniform constants, under affine perturbations HHH with small ∥∇H∥\|\nabla H\|∥∇H∥.
  2. Corollary 8.5 (p. 26): a constraint system F(x)∈QF(x)\in QF(x)∈Q transverse at xˉ\bar xxˉ is uniformly metrically regular under small affine perturbations.
  3. Theorem 8.6 (p. 27): the comparison inequalities between φ(y)\varphi(y)φ(y) and φ(x;⋅)\varphi(x;\cdot)φ(x;⋅) after moving yyy by O(∥y−x∥2)O(\|y-x\|^2)O(∥y−x∥2).
  4. Proposition 8.8 (p. 28): the linearized maps inherit transversality, and φ(x;⋅)\varphi(x;\cdot)φ(x;⋅) is prox-regular at xˉ\bar xxˉ uniformly in xxx (8.4).
  5. Theorem 8.9 (p. 29): every stationary point xtx^txt of the subproblem lies near a point x^\hat xx^ that is nearly stationary for φ\varphiφ, with dist⁡(0;∂φ(x^))≤(a+b/t)∥xt−x∥\operatorname{dist}(0;\partial\varphi(\hat x))\le(a+b/t)\|x^t-x\|dist(0;∂φ(x^))≤(a+b/t)∥xt−x∥.

Significance

Subregularity of Gt\mathcal G_tGt​ at (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0) is exactly the error bound property of the prox-linear step, the hypothesis under which linear convergence arguments run. Theorem 8.11 says that, for the attentive parts of the graphs, this property is equivalent to subregularity of ∂φ\partial\varphi∂φ, which does not refer to any algorithm or step size. It therefore covers constrained composite problems (indicator functions hhh), nonconvex prox-regular penalties, and, in the convex case, removes the finite-valuedness assumption of Theorem 5.10.

The results are proved in the paper, partly by citation to Dontchev, Lewis and Rockafellar and to Lewis and Wright's analysis of prox-linear subproblems (arXiv:0812.0423). None of them is formalized: Mathlib has no proximal, limiting or horizon subdifferential, no metric regularity, and no prox-regularity. A formalization supplies these notions, checks the constant-chasing in Theorems 8.9 and 8.11, and fixes the precise quantifier order the prose leaves implicit.

Difficulty

The obvious route, copying the §5 argument, fails at its first step: §5 starts from the inequalities ∣φ(y)−φ(x;y)∣≤Lβ2∥x−y∥2|\varphi(y)-\varphi(x;y)|\le\frac{L\beta}2\|x-y\|^2∣φ(y)−φ(x;y)∣≤2Lβ​∥x−y∥2, and when hhh takes the value +∞+\infty+∞ one of φ(y)\varphi(y)φ(y), φ(x;y)\varphi(x;y)φ(x;y) can be finite while the other is infinite, so no such inequality holds. Theorem 8.6 replaces it by a comparison after perturbing yyy, which needs the stability of metric regularity (Theorem 8.4) and the epigraphical description of subgradients. A second obstacle is that St\mathcal S_tSt​ collects stationary points of nonconvex subproblems, so it is set-valued and possibly empty; the proofs need prox-regularity that is uniform over the family φ(x;⋅)\varphi(x;\cdot)φ(x;⋅) (Proposition 8.8) and a local existence result for St\mathcal S_tSt​ to obtain the threshold tˉ\bar ttˉ. The limiting-subdifferential calculus (the chain rule ∂φ(xˉ)⊆∇c(xˉ)∗∂h(c(xˉ))\partial\varphi(\bar x)\subseteq\nabla c(\bar x)^*\partial h(c(\bar x))∂φ(xˉ)⊆∇c(xˉ)∗∂h(c(xˉ)) under transversality) is itself a substantial piece of variational analysis.

Formalization scope

Points are in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); hhh, φ\varphiφ, φ(x;⋅)\varphi(x;\cdot)φ(x;⋅) and φt(x;⋅)\varphi_t(x;\cdot)φt​(x;⋅) are EReal-valued. Standing assumptions on every statement: ccc is C1C^1C1 (ContDiff ℝ 1 c), hhh is lower semicontinuous and never −∞-\infty−∞ (the page's closed functions are only ever evaluated where finite or +∞+\infty+∞; this is a disclosed addition). ∇c(x)\nabla c(x)∇c(x) is fderiv ℝ c x and ∇c(x)∗\nabla c(x)^*∇c(x)∗ its adjoint. "∣a−φ(xˉ)∣<ϵ|a-\varphi(\bar x)|<\epsilon∣a−φ(xˉ)∣<ϵ" requires aaa finite. dist⁡(yˉ;∅)=+∞\operatorname{dist}(\bar y;\varnothing)=+\inftydist(yˉ​;∅)=+∞, so (sub)regularity inequalities are stated for every element of F(x)F(x)F(x), and metric regularity carries nonemptiness of F−1(y)F^{-1}(y)F−1(y); dist⁡(0;∂φ(x^))≤r\operatorname{dist}(0;\partial\varphi(\hat x))\le rdist(0;∂φ(x^))≤r is the existence of a subgradient of norm at most rrr. St\mathcal S_tSt​ and Gt\mathcal G_tGt​ are sets defined by stationarity, never a chosen minimizer. Two printed slips are corrected and disclosed: in Definition 8.10 (2) the neighbourhood Y\mathcal YY is a neighbourhood of xˉ\bar xxˉ, and in Theorem 8.11 the threshold satisfies tˉ>0\bar t>0tˉ>0 (with tˉ=0\bar t=0tˉ=0 the converse would be vacuous). "When hhh is convex" is the convexity inequality in R‾\overline{\mathbb R}R, with the theorem's other hypotheses kept.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: subregularity always includes 0∈F(xˉ)0\in F(\bar x)0∈F(xˉ), a constant l>0l>0l>0 and a neighbourhood, so the content of (i) and (ii) cannot collapse into the trivial existence of a localization (any map is a localization of itself); and distances to empty sets are never junk zeros.

A complete development needs the three subdifferentials and their basic calculus (sum rule with a smooth function, chain rule under transversality, closedness of the limiting subdifferential), metric regularity and its perturbation stability, Ekeland's variational principle (on the platform as EkelandVP.General.ekeland_variational_principle), and a local existence result for stationary points of the subproblems. The subdifferential and regularity layer is reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and of supporting lemmas on the variational-analysis substrate, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Drusvyatskiy and A. S. Lewis, Error bounds, quadratic growth, and linear convergence of proximal methods, Math. Oper. Res. 43(3), 2018; arXiv:1602.06661v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1602.06661
  • A. L. Dontchev, A. S. Lewis and R. T. Rockafellar, The radius of metric regularity, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 355(2), 2003. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-02-03088-X
  • A. S. Lewis and S. J. Wright, A proximal method for composite minimization, Math. Program. 158, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/0812.0423
  • R. A. Poliquin and R. T. Rockafellar, Prox-regular functions in variational analysis, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 348(5), 1996. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-96-01544-9
  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Grundlehren 317, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster Convergence Rates of Relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM Under Regularity Assumptions IV: Lipschitz ∇g and Strongly Convex f (or Vice Versa) Make Relaxed PRS Contract LinearlyResearch Paper

Motivation

Peaceman–Rachford splitting separates the minimization of a sum into two proximal computations. That matters when each summand has a tractable proximal map but the sum does not. Douglas–Rachford splitting is its half-relaxed instance, and related iterations appear in the analysis of ADMM. Davis and Yin study how regularity of the two summands changes the rate at which a relaxed Peaceman–Rachford iteration approaches a fixed point. Their Section 4 distinguishes two arrangements: one summand may carry both strong convexity and a Lipschitz gradient, or the two properties may be shared between summands. The mixed case of Theorem 4.3 is the target of this mission. The authors describe it as a new result in the preprint version used here. Davis and Yin, §4, pp. 13–16.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space and let f,g:H→(−∞,+∞]f,g:H\to(-\infty,+\infty]f,g:H→(−∞,+∞] be proper, closed, convex functions. For a step size γ>0\gamma>0γ>0, the proximal map Pf=prox⁡γfP_f=\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma f}Pf​=proxγf​ takes a point zzz to the minimizer of f(x)+∥x−z∥2/(2γ)f(x)+\|x-z\|^2/(2\gamma)f(x)+∥x−z∥2/(2γ); define PgP_gPg​ similarly. The reflection associated with a proximal map PPP is RP=2P−IR_P=2P-IRP​=2P−I. The Peaceman–Rachford operator is TPRS=RPf∘RPgT_{\rm PRS}=R_{P_f}\circ R_{P_g}TPRS​=RPf​​∘RPg​​. Its relaxed iteration, Algorithm 1 of the paper, is

zk+1=(1−λk)zk+λkTPRS(zk),0<λk≤1.z^{k+1}=(1-\lambda_k)z^k+\lambda_k T_{\rm PRS}(z^k), \qquad 0<\lambda_k\le1.zk+1=(1−λk​)zk+λk​TPRS​(zk),0<λk​≤1.

The analysis fixes a point z∗z^*z∗ satisfying TPRS(z∗)=z∗T_{\rm PRS}(z^*)=z^*TPRS​(z∗)=z∗ and writes x∗=Pg(z∗)x^*=P_g(z^*)x∗=Pg​(z∗). It also uses the two proximal points xgk=Pg(zk)x_g^k=P_g(z^k)xgk​=Pg​(zk) and xfk=Pf(RPg(zk))x_f^k=P_f(R_{P_g}(z^k))xfk​=Pf​(RPg​​(zk)). Their selected proximal subgradients are ∇~g(xgk)=(zk−xgk)/γ\widetilde\nabla g(x_g^k)=(z^k-x_g^k)/\gamma∇g(xgk​)=(zk−xgk​)/γ and ∇~f(xfk)=(RPg(zk)−xfk)/γ\widetilde\nabla f(x_f^k)=(R_{P_g}(z^k)-x_f^k)/\gamma∇f(xfk​)=(RPg​​(zk)−xfk​)/γ. Lemma 1.1 states that they belong to the respective convex subdifferentials and relates them to the iteration. These are selected subgradients, rather than arbitrary members of a set-valued subdifferential. Davis and Yin, §1.2 and Lemma 1.1, pp. 4–7.

A function is μ\muμ-strongly convex when its convexity inequality improves by the quadratic term μt(1−t)∥x−y∥2/2\mu t(1-t)\|x-y\|^2/2μt(1−t)∥x−y∥2/2. A (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient means the function is real valued, differentiable, and ∥∇h(x)−∇h(y)∥≤∥x−y∥/β\|\nabla h(x)-\nabla h(y)\|\le\|x-y\|/\beta∥∇h(x)−∇h(y)∥≤∥x−y∥/β, with β>0\beta>0β>0. Section 1.10 also permits the parameters μ\muμ and β\betaβ to be zero when a property is unavailable. Its auxiliary term Sf(x,y)S_f(x,y)Sf​(x,y) is the maximum of a squared-point-distance term weighted by μf/2\mu_f/2μf​/2 and a squared-selected-subgradient-distance term weighted by βf/2\beta_f/2βf​/2. The one-step bound (2.1) controls the sum of the corresponding terms for fff and ggg. Davis and Yin, (1.13)–(1.14) and (2.1), pp. 7–8.

Formalization targets

Mixed regularity: Theorem 4.3

Suppose μ,β>0\mu,\beta>0μ,β>0. The goal covers both arrangements: fff is μ\muμ-strongly convex while ggg has a (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient, and the arrangement with fff and ggg exchanged. In either case the target is

∥zk+1−z∗∥≤C(λk)∥zk−z∗∥,C(t)=(1−4t3min⁡{γμ,βγ,1−t})1/2.\|z^{k+1}-z^*\|\le C(\lambda_k)\|z^k-z^*\|, \qquad C(t)=\left(1-\frac{4t}{3}\min\left\{\gamma\mu,\frac{\beta}{\gamma},1-t\right\}\right)^{1/2}.∥zk+1−z∗∥≤C(λk​)∥zk−z∗∥,C(t)=(1−34t​min{γμ,γβ​,1−t})1/2.

The factor is the paper's explicit factor, for 0≤t≤10\le t\le10≤t≤1. It is strictly below one for 0<t<10<t<10<t<1 with fixed positive regularity parameters; at t=1t=1t=1 it equals one. A uniform geometric rate therefore requires relaxation parameters to remain in a range where these factors have a uniform upper bound below one. Davis and Yin, Theorem 4.3, p. 16.

Companion rates

Theorems 4.1 and 4.2 give the explicit factors when ggg, or respectively fff, supplies both properties. Proposition 4.1 translates a fixed-point contraction sequence into bounds on the proximal points, selected subgradients, fixed-point residual, and objective error. These are companion items in the proposal. The milestone list follows Lemma 1.1, the auxiliary bound (2.1), and the displayed estimates (4.6) and (4.7) from the proof of the mixed case. Davis and Yin, Proposition 4.1 and Theorems 4.1–4.3, pp. 13–16.

Significance

Theorem 4.3 identifies a rate available when neither summand alone carries both regularity properties. The explicit dependence on γ\gammaγ, μ\muμ, β\betaβ, and λk\lambda_kλk​ lets a reader compare choices of step size and relaxation without hiding them in an unspecified constant. Proposition 4.1 explains what a contraction in the auxiliary fixed-point variable says about the quantities used to judge an optimization method: proximal point error, residual, and objective error. The distinction between a per-step bound and a uniform geometric rate is part of the mathematical result.

The inequalities are proved in the source paper; the remaining work here is to give their statements and eventual proofs a machine-checked account. The shared setting makes the proximal operator, selected subgradients, and regularity terms explicit, so the same formal definitions can be used across this mission's estimates. The two external platform definitions cited by this development already provide the closed proper convex class, proximal-map predicate, smooth convex class, and subdifferential. The results in this proposal are open Lean statements until solvers supply proofs.

Difficulty

Strong convexity and Lipschitz smoothness control different quantities in the mixed case. The decrease inequality directly bounds distances between proximal points and between gradients, whereas the desired conclusion concerns zk−z∗z^k-z^*zk−z∗. Treating TPRST_{\rm PRS}TPRS​ merely as a nonexpansive operator yields no factor below one. The displayed estimate (4.7) expresses the fixed-point distance through the quantities controlled by (4.6). The proof must also identify the proximal subgradient of the smooth summand with its ordinary gradient, rather than assume that identity as part of the goal. Davis and Yin, proof of Theorem 4.3, p. 16.

Formalization scope

The Lean carrier is a complete real inner-product space, including the zero space. The functions take values in EReal to represent +∞+\infty+∞ outside their effective domains. The published IsProperClosedConvex, IsProx, IsSmoothConvex, and subgrad definitions supply the common function and operator conventions. A proximal map is passed as a function together with a proof that it minimizes the defining objective; under the standing assumptions it is uniquely determined. Every result involving a proximal map assumes γ>0\gamma>0γ>0. Run statements require 0<λk≤10<\lambda_k\le10<λk​≤1, and the mixed theorem requires μ,β>0\mu,\beta>0μ,β>0. The goal has no hypothesis asserting any of its decrease estimates or a contraction; those are results to establish.

The contraction factors use Real.sqrt. For the mixed and fff-regular factors, the radicands are positive throughout the relaxation range. For the ggg-regular factor, its nonnegativity follows from the compatibility of positive strong convexity and gradient Lipschitz parameters on a nonzero space; the zero space makes the contraction statement trivial even if that radicand is negative. Objective errors use real values only at proximal points where both summands are finite. The milestone (2.1) uses the paper's selected proximal subgradients. Proving the link between smooth gradients and those subgradients, and reusable proximal-map inequalities, are welcome contributions beyond the four named milestones.

Selected references

  • Damek Davis and Wotao Yin, Faster convergence rates of relaxed Peaceman–Rachford and ADMM under regularity assumptions, arXiv:1407.5210v3, 2015; published in Mathematics of Operations Research 42(3), 2017. Preprint, journal DOI.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster Convergence Rates of Relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM Under Regularity Assumptions V: Relaxed PRS on Squared Distances Converges Linearly Under Bounded Linear RegularityResearch Paper

Motivation

The convex feasibility problem asks for a point in the intersection of closed convex sets. It underlies signal and image reconstruction, phase retrieval relaxations, and the constraint handling inside larger optimization methods. The workhorse algorithms are projection methods: the method of alternating projections (MAP), going back to von Neumann for subspaces, and the Douglas–Rachford and Peaceman–Rachford splitting schemes, which can be applied to the indicator, distance or squared-distance functions of the sets.

Without a regularity condition on how the sets meet, projection methods can converge arbitrarily slowly. Bounded linear regularity, an error bound saying that a point close to every set is close to their intersection, is the standard condition under which linear rates are obtained (Bauschke and Borwein, SIAM Review, 1996, doi:10.1137/S0036144593251710). Section 5 of D. Davis and W. Yin, Faster convergence rates of relaxed Peaceman–Rachford and ADMM under regularity assumptions (arXiv:1407.5210v3, Math. Oper. Res. 42(3), 2017) applies relaxed Peaceman–Rachford splitting (PRS) to the squared distance functions of two sets and proves that, under bounded linear regularity, the distance of the iterates to the intersection contracts by an explicit factor at every step, with step sizes and relaxation parameters allowed to vary between iterations. MAP is the special case of step size 1/21/21/2 and relaxation 111.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space and Cf,Cg⊆HC_f, C_g \subseteq \mathcal HCf​,Cg​⊆H closed convex sets with Cf∩Cg≠∅C_f\cap C_g\neq\emptysetCf​∩Cg​=∅. For C⊆HC\subseteq\mathcal HC⊆H the distance function is dC(x)=inf⁡y∈C∥x−y∥d_C(x)=\inf_{y\in C}\|x-y\|dC​(x)=infy∈C​∥x−y∥, and PCP_CPC​ is the metric projection, the nearest point of CCC. The problem is modelled with

f(x)=dCf2(x),g(x)=dCg2(x).f(x)=d^2_{C_f}(x),\qquad g(x)=d^2_{C_g}(x).f(x)=dCf​2​(x),g(x)=dCg​2​(x).

For γ>0\gamma>0γ>0 the proximal map proxγh(x)\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma h}(x)proxγh​(x) is the minimiser of h(y)+12γ∥y−x∥2h(y)+\frac1{2\gamma}\|y-x\|^2h(y)+2γ1​∥y−x∥2, and the reflection is reflγh=2 proxγh−I\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma h}=2\,\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma h}-Ireflγh​=2proxγh​−I. With two step sizes, TPRSγf,γg=reflγff∘reflγggT^{\gamma_f,\gamma_g}_{\mathrm{PRS}}=\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma_f f}\circ\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma_g g}TPRSγf​,γg​​=reflγf​f​∘reflγg​g​, and (T)λ=(1−λ)I+λT(T)_\lambda=(1-\lambda)I+\lambda T(T)λ​=(1−λ)I+λT.

Given z0z^0z0, step sizes γf,k,γg,k>0\gamma_{f,k},\gamma_{g,k}>0γf,k​,γg,k​>0 and relaxation parameters λk∈(0,1]\lambda_k\in(0,1]λk​∈(0,1], iteration (5.1) is

xgk=proxγg,kdCg2(zk),xfk=proxγf,kdCf2(2xgk−zk),zk+1=zk+2λk(xfk−xgk).x_g^k=\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma_{g,k}d^2_{C_g}}(z^k),\quad x_f^k=\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma_{f,k}d^2_{C_f}}(2x_g^k-z^k),\quad z^{k+1}=z^k+2\lambda_k(x_f^k-x_g^k).xgk​=proxγg,k​dCg​2​​(zk),xfk​=proxγf,k​dCf​2​​(2xgk​−zk),zk+1=zk+2λk​(xfk​−xgk​).

The pair {Cf,Cg}\{C_f,C_g\}{Cf​,Cg​} is boundedly linearly regular (Definition 5.1) if for every ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 there is μρ>0\mu_\rho>0μρ​>0 such that

dCf∩Cg(x)≤μρmax⁡{dCf(x),dCg(x)}for all x∈B(0,ρ),d_{C_f\cap C_g}(x)\le\mu_\rho\max\{d_{C_f}(x),d_{C_g}(x)\}\qquad\text{for all }x\in B(0,\rho),dCf​∩Cg​​(x)≤μρ​max{dCf​​(x),dCg​​(x)}for all x∈B(0,ρ),

where B(0,ρ)B(0,\rho)B(0,ρ) is the open ball. The rate function is

C(γf,γg,λ,μ)=(1−4λmin⁡{γg/(2γg+1)2, γf/(2γf+1)2}μ2max⁡{16γg2/(2γg+1)2, 1})1/2.C(\gamma_f,\gamma_g,\lambda,\mu)=\left(1-\frac{4\lambda\min\{\gamma_g/(2\gamma_g+1)^2,\ \gamma_f/(2\gamma_f+1)^2\}}{\mu^2\max\{16\gamma_g^2/(2\gamma_g+1)^2,\ 1\}}\right)^{1/2}.C(γf​,γg​,λ,μ)=(1−μ2max{16γg2​/(2γg​+1)2, 1}4λmin{γg​/(2γg​+1)2, γf​/(2γf​+1)2}​)1/2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

Suppose {Cf,Cg}\{C_f,C_g\}{Cf​,Cg​} is boundedly linearly regular, (zk)(z^k)(zk) is generated by (5.1), every zjz^jzj lies in B(0,ρ)B(0,\rho)B(0,ρ), and dCf∩Cg≤μρmax⁡{dCf,dCg}d_{C_f\cap C_g}\le\mu_\rho\max\{d_{C_f},d_{C_g}\}dCf​∩Cg​​≤μρ​max{dCf​​,dCg​​} on B(0,ρ)B(0,\rho)B(0,ρ). Then for all k≥0k\ge0k≥0

dCf∩Cg(zk+1)≤C(γf,k,γg,k,λk,μρ) dCf∩Cg(zk),(5.3)d_{C_f\cap C_g}(z^{k+1})\le C(\gamma_{f,k},\gamma_{g,k},\lambda_k,\mu_\rho)\,d_{C_f\cap C_g}(z^k), \tag{5.3}dCf​∩Cg​​(zk+1)≤C(γf,k​,γg,k​,λk​,μρ​)dCf​∩Cg​​(zk),(5.3)

and if C‾=sup⁡jC(γf,j,γg,j,λj,μρ)<1\overline C=\sup_j C(\gamma_{f,j},\gamma_{g,j},\lambda_j,\mu_\rho)<1C=supj​C(γf,j​,γg,j​,λj​,μρ​)<1, the iterates converge to a point x∈Cf∩Cgx\in C_f\cap C_gx∈Cf​∩Cg​ with

∥zk−x∥≤2 dCf∩Cg(z0)∏i=0k−1C(γf,i,γg,i,λi,μρ).(5.4)\|z^k-x\|\le 2\,d_{C_f\cap C_g}(z^0)\prod_{i=0}^{k-1}C(\gamma_{f,i},\gamma_{g,i},\lambda_i,\mu_\rho). \tag{5.4}∥zk−x∥≤2dCf​∩Cg​​(z0)i=0∏k−1​C(γf,i​,γg,i​,λi​,μρ​).(5.4)

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's own argument: Proposition 5.1 Parts 2 and 3 (the gradient of dC2d_C^2dC2​ and the closed form proxγdC2=12γ+1I+2γ2γ+1PC\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma d_C^2}=\frac1{2\gamma+1}I+\frac{2\gamma}{2\gamma+1}P_CproxγdC2​​=2γ+11​I+2γ+12γ​PC​); Proposition 5.2, the fundamental inequality specialised to squared distances; Propositions C.1 and C.2 (the fixed-point set of TPRSγf,γgT^{\gamma_f,\gamma_g}_{\mathrm{PRS}}TPRSγf​,γg​​ is Cf∩CgC_f\cap C_gCf​∩Cg​, and the iterates are Fejér monotone for λk∈(0,1]\lambda_k\in(0,1]λk​∈(0,1]); and the displays (5.5)–(5.7), (5.8), (5.10) and (5.11) of the proof of Theorem 5.1, ending with the one-step contraction at a single point.

Companion: Corollary 5.1

With γf,k≡γg,k≡12\gamma_{f,k}\equiv\gamma_{g,k}\equiv\frac12γf,k​≡γg,k​≡21​ and λk≡1\lambda_k\equiv1λk​≡1, iteration (5.1) is MAP, zk+1=PCfPCgzkz^{k+1}=P_{C_f}P_{C_g}z^kzk+1=PCf​​PCg​​zk, and under the assumptions of Theorem 5.1 it contracts the distance to Cf∩CgC_f\cap C_gCf​∩Cg​ by (1−1/μρ2)1/2(1-1/\mu_\rho^2)^{1/2}(1−1/μρ2​)1/2 from the second iterate on, converging linearly to a point of the intersection.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 gives an explicit, iteration-wise linear rate for relaxed PRS on the two-set feasibility problem with step sizes and relaxation parameters that may change from step to step. Its specialisation, Corollary 5.1, recovers linear convergence of MAP under bounded linear regularity with rate (1−1/μρ2)1/2(1-1/\mu_\rho^2)^{1/2}(1−1/μρ2​)1/2, better than the (1−1/(8μ2))1/2(1-1/(8\mu^2))^{1/2}(1−1/(8μ2))1/2 derived in earlier work on cyclic projections. Remark 5.1 of the paper notes that Douglas–Rachford on indicator functions is a limiting case of the scheme as the step sizes grow, though the rate degenerates in that limit.

The results are proved in the paper; the proof of the convergence statement cites Bauschke–Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, Theorem 5.12 (Fejér monotone sequences whose distance to a closed convex set decays converge strongly). No machine-checked proof of these statements was found on Prove2Me (search of 2026-10-07). A formalization produces a checked chain from the closed form of the prox of dC2d_C^2dC2​ through the fundamental inequality to the linear rate, and with it reusable facts about squared distance functions, metric projections onto closed convex sets in Hilbert space, and Fejér monotone sequences.

Difficulty

The obvious argument would contract the distance to Cf∩CgC_f\cap C_gCf​∩Cg​ directly, but one PRS step measures only dCgd_{C_g}dCg​​ at zzz and dCfd_{C_f}dCf​​ at the reflected point reflγgg(z)\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma_g g}(z)reflγg​g​(z), never dCf(z)d_{C_f}(z)dCf​​(z). Transferring the second distance back to zzz costs a factor max⁡{c12,1}\max\{c_1^2,1\}max{c12​,1} with c1=4γg/(2γg+1)c_1=4\gamma_g/(2\gamma_g+1)c1​=4γg​/(2γg​+1), and only after that does the regularity inequality turn max⁡{dCf(z),dCg(z)}\max\{d_{C_f}(z),d_{C_g}(z)\}max{dCf​​(z),dCg​​(z)} into dCf∩Cg(z)d_{C_f\cap C_g}(z)dCf​∩Cg​​(z). The fundamental inequality (5.2) itself rests on the prox-gradient calculus of the earlier sections, specialised to functions whose gradients 2(I−PC)2(I-P_C)2(I−PC​) are Lipschitz. Passing from a contracting distance to convergence of the iterates to one point needs Fejér monotonicity and a completeness argument; a contracting distance alone does not give a limit.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in a real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H with CompleteSpace H); dCd_CdC​ is Mathlib's Metric.infDist. The squared distance is viewed as an extended-real function so that the published proximal predicate ThreeOpSplitting.ConvexRates.IsProx applies, and prox maps are arbitrary maps satisfying it (unique here). Metric projections are maps satisfying the published RandomGradFree.Nonsmooth.IsMetricProjection. Step sizes and prox maps are indexed by the iteration. The hypotheses of the goal are: Cf,CgC_f,C_gCf​,Cg​ closed and convex with nonempty intersection; bounded linear regularity of the pair; γf,k,γg,k>0\gamma_{f,k},\gamma_{g,k}>0γf,k​,γg,k​>0; λk∈(0,1]\lambda_k\in(0,1]λk​∈(0,1]; iterates in an open ball B(0,ρ)B(0,\rho)B(0,ρ) on which the regularity inequality holds with μρ>0\mu_\rho>0μρ​>0. The range λk∈(0,1]\lambda_k\in(0,1]λk​∈(0,1] is Algorithm 1's standing assumption, used in the proof but not restated in (5.1). The condition C‾<1\overline C<1C<1 is stated as a uniform bound c<1c<1c<1 on all rate factors. The product in (5.4) runs over i=0,…,k−1i=0,\dots,k-1i=0,…,k−1; the page prints the upper index kkk, which claims an extra factor that the proof does not give. In the proof's (5.9)–(5.10) the page swaps γf\gamma_fγf​ and γg\gamma_gγg​ relative to (5.2); the milestone states the pairing that (5.2) produces. Corollary 5.1's improved rate is stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1, since it uses zk∈Cfz^k\in C_fzk∈Cf​.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal mentions none of the proof's intermediate quantities, takes the prox maps as genuine minimisers of the squared-distance objective rather than chosen points, and measures distances to a nonempty intersection, so the junk value of infDist on the empty set never arises.

A complete development needs the closed form of proxγdC2\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma d^2_C}proxγdC2​​, differentiability of dC2d_C^2dC2​, the fundamental inequality of the paper's §1 specialised to these functions, and the convergence theorem for Fejér monotone sequences. The last three are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and of Mathlib-level lemmas on metric projections, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Davis, W. Yin, Faster convergence rates of relaxed Peaceman–Rachford and ADMM under regularity assumptions, Mathematics of Operations Research 42(3), 2017; arXiv version used here: arXiv:1407.5210v3.
  • H. H. Bauschke, J. M. Borwein, On projection algorithms for solving convex feasibility problems, SIAM Review 38(3), 1996. doi:10.1137/S0036144593251710
  • H. H. Bauschke, P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, Springer, 2011. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-9467-7
  • P.-L. Lions, B. Mercier, Splitting algorithms for the sum of two nonlinear operators, SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis 16(6), 1979. doi:10.1137/0716071
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Captain: mikedeng1

A Unified Convergence Analysis of Block Successive Minimization Methods for Nonsmooth Optimization II: Limit Points of Cyclic BSUM with Unique Block Minimizers Are Coordinatewise StationaryResearch Paper

Motivation

Many large optimization problems in signal processing, statistics and machine learning have a variable that splits naturally into blocks, and are solved by updating one block at a time. The classical method of this kind, block coordinate descent (BCD), minimises the objective exactly in one block while the others are held fixed. In practice the exact block subproblem is often too expensive, and one minimises instead a simpler function that upper-bounds the objective and touches it at the current point. The EM algorithm, DC (difference of convex) programming, proximal and linearised block updates and several alternating schemes for matrix factorisation and transceiver design are all of this form.

Razaviyayn, Hong and Luo (arXiv:1209.2385, SIAM J. Optim. 23 (2013)) gave one convergence analysis for this whole family, the block successive upper-bound minimization (BSUM) method, without convexity or smoothness of the objective. This mission formalizes the block part of that analysis: the cyclic BSUM method (Theorem 2) and its maximum-improvement variant MISUM (Theorem 3).

Timeline. Bertsekas (Nonlinear Programming, 1999, Prop. 2.7.1) proved that limit points of cyclic BCD are stationary for continuously differentiable objectives over a product of closed convex sets when each block minimiser is unique. Tseng (J. Optim. Theory Appl. 109, 2001) treated nondifferentiable objectives using regularity and coordinatewise minima. Chen, He, Li and Zhang (SIAM J. Optim. 22, 2012) introduced maximum block improvement, which drops the uniqueness assumption. The 2013 paper extends these results from exact block minimisation of fff to minimisation of block upper bounds.

Setting

The problem is

min⁡x f(x)s.t.x∈X=X1×⋯×Xn,(12)\min_x\ f(x)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad x\in\mathcal X=\mathcal X_1\times\cdots\times\mathcal X_n,\qquad (12)xmin​ f(x)s.t.x∈X=X1​×⋯×Xn​,(12)

where each Xi⊆Rmi\mathcal X_i\subseteq\mathbb R^{m_i}Xi​⊆Rmi​ is a closed convex set and fff is a continuous real function on X\mathcal XX. A point is x=(x1,…,xn)x=(x_1,\dots,x_n)x=(x1​,…,xn​) with xi∈Rmix_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i}xi​∈Rmi​. The directional derivative is f′(x;d)=lim inf⁡λ↓0 (f(x+λd)−f(x))/λf'(x;d)=\liminf_{\lambda\downarrow0}\,(f(x+\lambda d)-f(x))/\lambdaf′(x;d)=liminfλ↓0​(f(x+λd)−f(x))/λ, a value in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞]. A point z∈Xz\in\mathcal Xz∈X is stationary for (12) if f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 for every ddd with z+d∈Xz+d\in\mathcal Xz+d∈X. The function fff is regular at zzz if f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 holds for every d=(d1,…,dn)d=(d_1,\dots,d_n)d=(d1​,…,dn​) such that f′(z;(0,…,dk,…,0))≥0f'(z;(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0))\ge0f′(z;(0,…,dk​,…,0))≥0 for every block kkk. A point z∈Xz\in\mathcal Xz∈X is coordinatewise stationary if f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 for every d=(0,…,dk,…,0)d=(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0)d=(0,…,dk​,…,0) with zk+dk∈Xkz_k+d_k\in\mathcal X_kzk​+dk​∈Xk​, for every kkk.

For each block iii an approximation function ui(xi,y)u_i(x_i,y)ui​(xi​,y) is given, with xi∈Rmix_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i}xi​∈Rmi​ and y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X. Assumption 2 requires:

  • (B1) ui(yi,y)=f(y)u_i(y_i,y)=f(y)ui​(yi​,y)=f(y) for y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X;
  • (B2) ui(xi,y)≥f(y1,…,yi−1,xi,yi+1,…,yn)u_i(x_i,y)\ge f(y_1,\dots,y_{i-1},x_i,y_{i+1},\dots,y_n)ui​(xi​,y)≥f(y1​,…,yi−1​,xi​,yi+1​,…,yn​) for xi∈Xix_i\in\mathcal X_ixi​∈Xi​, y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X;
  • (B3) ui′(xi,y;di)∣xi=yi=f′(y;(0,…,di,…,0))u_i'(x_i,y;d_i)\big|_{x_i=y_i}=f'(y;(0,\dots,d_i,\dots,0))ui′​(xi​,y;di​)​xi​=yi​​=f′(y;(0,…,di​,…,0)) whenever yi+di∈Xiy_i+d_i\in\mathcal X_iyi​+di​∈Xi​, the left side being the derivative in xix_ixi​ only;
  • (B4) uiu_iui​ is continuous in (xi,y)(x_i,y)(xi​,y).

The BSUM algorithm (Fig. 2) starts at x0∈Xx^0\in\mathcal Xx0∈X and, at each iteration, picks a block iii by the cyclic rule, replaces xix_ixi​ by any minimiser of ui(⋅,xr−1)u_i(\cdot,x^{r-1})ui​(⋅,xr−1) over Xi\mathcal X_iXi​, and keeps the other blocks. The MISUM algorithm (Fig. 3) instead updates a block kkk attaining min⁡imin⁡xi∈Xiui(xi,xr−1)\min_i\min_{x_i\in\mathcal X_i}u_i(x_i,x^{r-1})mini​minxi​∈Xi​​ui​(xi​,xr−1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2(a)

If each ui(xi,y)u_i(x_i,y)ui​(xi​,y) is quasi-convex in xix_ixi​, Assumption 2 holds and every block subproblem min⁡xi∈Xiui(xi,y)\min_{x_i\in\mathcal X_i}u_i(x_i,y)minxi​∈Xi​​ui​(xi​,y), y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X, has a unique solution, then every limit point zzz of the cyclic BSUM iterates satisfies

f′(z;d)≥0∀ d=(0,…,dk,…,0), zk+dk∈Xk, k=1,…,n,f'(z;d)\ge0\qquad\forall\,d=(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0),\ z_k+d_k\in\mathcal X_k,\ k=1,\dots,n,f′(z;d)≥0∀d=(0,…,dk​,…,0), zk​+dk​∈Xk​, k=1,…,n,

and zzz is a stationary point of (12) if fff is regular at zzz.

Milestones

The proof passes through the monotonicity f(x0)≥f(x1)≥⋯f(x^0)\ge f(x^1)\ge\cdotsf(x0)≥f(x1)≥⋯ (14); the limit lim⁡rf(xr)=f(z)\lim_r f(x^r)=f(z)limr​f(xr)=f(z) at a limit point zzz (15); the claim that xrj→zx^{r_j}\to zxrj​→z forces xrj+1→zx^{r_j+1}\to zxrj​+1→z; block minimality uk(zk,z)≤uk(xk,z)u_k(z_k,z)\le u_k(x_k,z)uk​(zk​,z)≤uk​(xk​,z) for all xk∈Xkx_k\in\mathcal X_kxk​∈Xk​ and every kkk; and the first-order condition uk′(xk,z;dk)∣xk=zk≥0u_k'(x_k,z;d_k)|_{x_k=z_k}\ge0uk′​(xk​,z;dk​)∣xk​=zk​​≥0 for feasible dkd_kdk​ (22).

Companions

Theorem 2(b): if the level set X0={x∈X:f(x)≤f(x0)}\mathcal X^0=\{x\in\mathcal X: f(x)\le f(x^0)\}X0={x∈X:f(x)≤f(x0)} is compact, block minimisers are unique in at least n−1n-1n−1 blocks and fff is regular on X0\mathcal X^0X0, then d(xr,X∗)→0d(x^r,\mathcal X^*)\to0d(xr,X∗)→0, where X∗\mathcal X^*X∗ is the set of stationary points. Theorem 3: under Assumption 2 alone, every limit point of the MISUM iterates is coordinatewise stationary, and stationary where fff is regular.

Significance

Theorem 2 is the stationarity guarantee for every method that can be written as cyclic block minimisation of tight upper bounds: block EM, alternating DC iterations, proximal block updates, and the matrix-factorisation and beamforming schemes of Section VIII of the paper. Each such method needs only a check of (B1)–(B4) to inherit it. Theorem 3 shows that the uniqueness assumption, which part (a) needs and BCD needs too, can be traded for a greedy block choice.

The results are proved in the paper. As far as the platform's catalogue shows, none of them has been formalized; the related published work is the formalization of Tseng's 2001 setting (directional derivative, stationarity, regularity, cyclic rule), which this mission reuses. Formalizing the analysis checks the "without loss of generality" and "by further restricting to a subsequence" steps, which carry most of the argument, and gives reusable statements about limit points of block methods.

Difficulty

The obvious argument shows that f(xr)f(x^r)f(xr) decreases and that a limit point zzz satisfies the block optimality condition for the block updated along the convergent subsequence. It does not say anything about the other blocks: consecutive iterates may stay a fixed distance apart, so the next iterate need not converge to zzz, and then nothing is known about zzz in the next block. Showing that xrj+1→zx^{r_j+1}\to zxrj​+1→z is the central step, and it is exactly where quasi-convexity and uniqueness of the block minimisers are used. Without uniqueness, limit points of even exact cyclic BCD need not be stationary (Powell's examples, which the paper cites), which is why Theorem 2(b) needs compactness and Theorem 3 needs a different update rule.

The step from block minimality to stationarity is a second gap: (B3) only matches derivatives in coordinate directions, and passing to all directions requires regularity of fff.

Formalization scope

The space Rm1×⋯×Rmn\mathbb R^{m_1}\times\cdots\times\mathbb R^{m_n}Rm1​×⋯×Rmn​ is the dependent product X n of the referenced Tseng setting, with blocks indexed 0,…,N−10,\dots,N-10,…,N−1 (paper block kkk is index k−1k-1k−1). It carries the sup norm over blocks, which matters only for distances; convergence statements do not depend on the norm. The block sets are closed and convex, fff is a real function continuous on X\mathcal XX, and x0∈Xx^0\in\mathcal Xx0∈X; these standing hypotheses of Section IV appear in every statement.

The paper assumes dom⁡f=X\operatorname{dom}f=\mathcal Xdomf=X. Accordingly fff is extended by +∞+\infty+∞ off X\mathcal XX, and stationarity and regularity are those of the extension. Directional derivatives are extended-real liminfs, never real-valued limits with a junk value. A run is a predicate on a sequence: each new block is a minimiser of the block subproblem, but existence of minimisers is not assumed. The cyclic rule updates block r mod Nr \bmod NrmodN on the step xr→xr+1x^r\to x^{r+1}xr→xr+1, a relabelling of Fig. 2's i=(r mod n)+1i=(r\bmod n)+1i=(rmodn)+1. Limit points are cluster points of the sequence.

Deviations from the printed statements, each disclosed in the items:

  • Theorems 2(a) and 3 say "coordinatewise minimum". Their proofs establish coordinatewise stationarity and call it that, and the literal minimum claim is false (one block, X=[−1,1]\mathcal X=[-1,1]X=[−1,1], f(x)=−x2f(x)=-x^2f(x)=−x2, a quadratic upper bound tight at the iterate; the run stays at 000 while f(1)<f(0)f(1)<f(0)f(1)<f(0)). The statements assert coordinatewise stationarity.
  • Theorem 2(b) assumes regularity "at every point in the set of stationary points"; the proof applies it at a limit point not yet known to be stationary. The statement assumes regularity on the level set X0\mathcal X^0X0, as Tseng's Theorem 4.1 does.
  • d(xr,X∗)→0d(x^r,\mathcal X^*)\to0d(xr,X∗)→0 is stated as "for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, eventually xrx^rxr is within ε\varepsilonε of a stationary point", so an empty X∗\mathcal X^*X∗ cannot make it true.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: hypotheses on uiu_iui​ are required on all of X\mathcal XX, not just along the run; uniqueness is required at every y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X; and a sorry-free check shows that all hypotheses of Theorem 2(a) hold together for a one-block instance.

Not formalized: Proposition 2 (a sufficient condition for (B3)), Corollaries 2 and 3 (essentially cyclic and overlapping rules) and the applications of Section VIII. Contributions of reusable lemmas about cluster points of block methods and first-order conditions for constrained minimisers in a single block are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Razaviyayn, M. Hong, Z.-Q. Luo, A unified convergence analysis of block successive minimization methods for nonsmooth optimization, arXiv:1209.2385v1, 2012; SIAM J. Optim. 23(2) (2013) 1126–1153. https://arxiv.org/abs/1209.2385
  • P. Tseng, Convergence of a block coordinate descent method for nondifferentiable minimization, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 109 (2001) 475–494. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1017501703105
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Nonlinear Programming, 2nd ed., Athena Scientific, 1999.
  • B. Chen, S. He, Z. Li, S. Zhang, Maximum block improvement and polynomial optimization, SIAM J. Optim. 22(1) (2012) 87–107. https://doi.org/10.1137/110834858
  • M. J. D. Powell, On search directions for minimization algorithms, Math. Program. 4 (1973) 193–201. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01584660
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment II: Under Quality Differentiation the Direct Channel Carries the High-Quality Product, the Manufacturer Gains and the Retailer LosesResearch Paper

Motivation

Manufacturers increasingly sell directly to consumers while continuing to supply independent retailers, a practice known as supply chain encroachment. The direct channel competes with the retailer for the same consumers, and the conventional advice for easing that conflict is to sell different products in the two channels. Ha, Long and Nasiry (MSOM 18(2), 2016; authors' manuscript SSRN 3970373) study this advice in a model where the manufacturer chooses product quality herself. This mission formalizes their Section 5: when the manufacturer may offer one quality directly and another through the retailer, which channel gets the better product, when is differentiation worth it, and who gains from encroachment.

The model builds on two lines of work. With exogenous quality, Arya, Mittendorf and Sappington (Marketing Science, 2007) showed that encroachment can benefit both firms, through a lower wholesale price. Vertical differentiation with a convex cost of quality goes back to Mussa and Rosen (JET, 1978), Moorthy (1988) and Motta (1993), where differentiation lets firms segment the market. The paper combines the two and finds that, once quality is endogenous, the retailer never gains.

Setting

A market of size 111 consists of consumers with types θ\thetaθ uniformly distributed on [0,1][0,1][0,1]; a consumer of type θ\thetaθ obtains surplus θv−p\theta v-pθv−p from a product of quality vvv at price ppp. A manufacturer sells a product of quality u>0u>0u>0 through her direct channel and a product of quality tututu, with quality ratio t>0t>0t>0, through a retailer. Producing one unit of quality vvv costs kv2kv^2kv2 (k>0k>0k>0); every unit sold directly costs a further direct selling cost c≥0c\ge 0c≥0; the retailer's selling cost is 000.

With quantities qMq_MqM​ (direct) and qRq_RqR​ (retailer), the market-clearing prices are, for t≤1t\le 1t≤1 (direct channel carries the higher quality),

pM=u(1−qM−t qR),pR=tu(1−qM−qR),p_M=u(1-q_M-t\,q_R),\qquad p_R=tu(1-q_M-q_R),pM​=u(1−qM​−tqR​),pR​=tu(1−qM​−qR​),

and for t>1t>1t>1 (retailer carries the higher quality)

pM=u(1−qM−qR),pR=tu(1−qR)−u qM.p_M=u(1-q_M-q_R),\qquad p_R=tu(1-q_R)-u\,q_M .pM​=u(1−qM​−qR​),pR​=tu(1−qR​)−uqM​.

The profits are ΠR=(pR−w)qR\Pi_R=(p_R-w)q_RΠR​=(pR​−w)qR​ and ΠM=(w−k(tu)2)qR+(pM−c−ku2)qM\Pi_M=(w-k(tu)^2)q_R+(p_M-c-ku^2)q_MΠM​=(w−k(tu)2)qR​+(pM​−c−ku2)qM​.

The game has three stages: (i) the manufacturer chooses a wholesale price www, the quality uuu and the ratio ttt; (ii) the retailer orders qR≥0q_R\ge0qR​≥0; (iii) the manufacturer chooses qM≥0q_M\ge0qM​≥0. Solutions are subgame-perfect equilibria. The manufacturer encroaches when qM∗>0q^*_M>0qM∗​>0 on the equilibrium path. Fixing t=1t=1t=1 gives the uniform-quality game of §4.1. The benchmark of §3.2 has no direct channel; its equilibrium profits are ΠMN=154k\Pi^N_M=\frac1{54k}ΠMN​=54k1​ and ΠRN=1108k\Pi^N_R=\frac1{108k}ΠRN​=108k1​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4(ii)

In every subgame-perfect equilibrium with qM∗>0q^*_M>0qM∗​>0,

ΠM∗>154k=ΠMNandΠR∗<1108k=ΠRN.\Pi^*_M>\frac{1}{54k}=\Pi^N_M\qquad\text{and}\qquad \Pi^*_R<\frac{1}{108k}=\Pi^N_R .ΠM∗​>54k1​=ΠMN​andΠR∗​<108k1​=ΠRN​.

The statement makes no assumption on which quality the manufacturer chooses, on the size of ccc or on the form of the equilibrium; the constants are the benchmark's.

Milestones

  1. The benchmark equilibrium (uN=13ku^N=\frac1{3k}uN=3k1​, wN=29kw^N=\frac2{9k}wN=9k2​, qRN=16q^N_R=\frac16qRN​=61​ and the two profits), p. 9.
  2. The quantity subgame (7) for t<1t<1t<1, p. 16, and the reduced profit ΠM(t,u)\Pi_M(t,u)ΠM​(t,u) obtained by optimizing www, p. 29.
  3. Lemma 1(i)–(ii): the manufacturer's optimal ratio t(u)t(u)t(u) for given uuu, when the retailer's product is lower (t≤1t\le1t≤1) or higher (t≥1t\ge1t≥1) quality.
  4. Claim 1 and Lemma 1(iii): for c<112kc<\frac1{12k}c<12k1​ the profits of the two kinds of differentiation cross exactly once in uuu.
  5. Proposition 3: under encroachment, t∗≤1t^*\le1t∗≤1.
  6. Proposition 1(iii) in the uniform-quality game.
  7. Claim 2 and Proposition 4(i): thresholds 0<c1<c20<c_1<c_20<c1​<c2​ such that the manufacturer differentiates (t∗<1t^*<1t∗<1) for c<c1c<c_1c<c1​, uses uniform quality for c1<c<c2c_1<c<c_2c1​<c<c2​, and does not encroach for c>c2c>c_2c>c2​.

Companions

The §6.1 benchmark in which both qualities go through the retailer (ΠMN2=150k\Pi^{N2}_M=\frac1{50k}ΠMN2​=50k1​, ΠRN2=1100k\Pi^{N2}_R=\frac1{100k}ΠRN2​=100k1​), Proposition 5 (the win–lose outcome against that benchmark), and the existence of an equilibrium. The threshold milestones assert existence for each cost, so their conclusions have an equilibrium to describe.

Significance

Proposition 4(ii) says that letting the manufacturer differentiate quality across channels does not change who wins: the manufacturer still gains from encroachment and the retailer still loses, although one might expect the retailer to benefit from not facing an identical product. Proposition 3 adds that differentiation, when used, puts the higher quality in the direct channel, and Proposition 4(i) shows that for intermediate selling costs the manufacturer prefers no differentiation at all, contrary to the monopoly intuition that segmentation always pays. Proposition 5 shows the conclusion persists against a benchmark in which the retailer already carries a two-product line.

The results are proved in the paper, in part with numerical verification (e.g. the bounds on u^\hat uu^ in the proof of Proposition 3, and the location of c1c_1c1​ and c2c_2c2​). None of them has been machine-checked. A formal development would turn these numerical steps into proofs and would leave a reusable, explicit model of a three-stage Stackelberg game with a vertically differentiated linear demand.

Difficulty

The equilibrium analysis is not a single concave program. Backward induction produces closed forms only on regions (the retailer's order must leave the manufacturer a positive direct quantity, and the retailer's quantity must stay positive), and the manufacturer's stage-1 problem is a comparison across these regions and across t<1t<1t<1, t=1t=1t=1 and t>1t>1t>1. The profit of low-quality encroachment, ΠML(u)\Pi^L_M(u)ΠML​(u), involves a square root in uuu, and the paper controls its critical points by a case analysis on polynomial derivatives with numerically located crossing points (pp. 39–40). The thresholds c1≈0.0973/kc_1\approx0.0973/kc1​≈0.0973/k and c2≈0.1019/kc_2\approx0.1019/kc2​≈0.1019/k are defined implicitly by the equality of maximized profits. Comparing the equilibrium profit with 154k\frac1{54k}54k1​ therefore requires bounding a maximum taken over a piecewise-defined family, not evaluating one formula.

Formalization scope

The game is defined in QualityEncroach.Differ.Game. Quantities are restricted to be nonnegative; the wholesale price is unrestricted, as in the paper; qualities satisfy u>0u>0u>0, t>0t>0t>0. The price formulas are used for all nonnegative quantities, as in the paper; the t>1t>1t>1 case, which the paper says "can be derived similarly", is that derivation. The equilibrium notion is subgame perfection written in one-shot-deviation form at every history, on and off the path. Benchmark profits appear as the constants 154k\frac1{54k}54k1​, 1108k\frac1{108k}108k1​ (and 150k\frac1{50k}50k1​, 1100k\frac1{100k}100k1​); separate items derive them from the benchmark games. Threshold statements give c2>0c_2>0c2​>0 and 0<c1<c20<c_1<c_20<c1​<c2​ depending only on kkk, assert equilibrium existence at every c≥0c\ge0c≥0, and say nothing at c=c2c=c_2c=c2​, where the paper's statements disagree. Lemma 1 and Claim 1 are stated about the paper's reduced-form profits, defined by the displayed formulas in QualityEncroach.Differ.Reduced; the item reduced_profit_high links ΠM(t,u)\Pi_M(t,u)ΠM​(t,u) for t≤1t\le1t≤1 to the game. Claim 1 retains c=0c=0c=0 and quantifies only over positive qualities, so no reduced form is evaluated at u=0u=0u=0.

The goal is about subgame-perfect equilibria of the game, not about the reduced forms: a proof that only compares closed-form profits does not prove it without the milestones linking those forms to equilibrium play. The goal is not vacuous only if an equilibrium with qM∗>0q^*_M>0qM∗​>0 exists; the companion spe_exists asserts existence.

Contributions are welcome at every level: the benchmark and the quantity subgame are routine calculus on quadratics; Lemma 1(i)–(ii) are one-variable sign analyses; Claim 1, Lemma 1(iii), Proposition 3 and the thresholds require the case analyses of the appendix.

Selected references

  • A. Ha, X. Long, J. Nasiry, Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 18(2), 2016. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2015.0562 (authors' manuscript: https://ssrn.com/abstract=3970373)
  • A. Arya, B. Mittendorf, D. Sappington, The Bright Side of Supplier Encroachment, Marketing Science 26(5), 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.1060.0228
  • M. Mussa, S. Rosen, Monopoly and Product Quality, Journal of Economic Theory 18(2), 1978. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0531(78)90085-6
  • K. S. Moorthy, Product and Price Competition in a Duopoly, Marketing Science 7(2), 1988. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.7.2.141
  • M. Motta, Endogenous Quality Choice: Price vs. Quantity Competition, Journal of Industrial Economics 41(2), 1993. https://doi.org/10.2307/2950430
16 thms1 active userReviewed
Differential GeometryNumerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Riemannian Proximal Gradient Methods II: The Riemannian Proximal Gradient Method Converges at Rate O(1/k) under Retraction ConvexityResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics, signal processing and machine learning minimize a smooth loss plus a nonsmooth regularizer over a set with manifold structure: sparse principal component analysis over the Stiefel manifold, sparse blind deconvolution over the sphere, and clustering and dictionary-learning models with orthogonality constraints. In Euclidean space the standard method for such composite problems is the proximal gradient method, whose O(1/k)O(1/k)O(1/k) rate for convex problems is classical (Beck–Teboulle 2009). Huang and Wei (arXiv:1909.06065v4, Mathematical Programming 2021) propose a Riemannian proximal gradient method (RPG) that solves its proximal subproblem on the tangent space and returns to the manifold through a retraction. They prove three things about it: global convergence, an O(1/k)O(1/k)O(1/k) rate under a convexity notion adapted to retractions, and local rates under a Riemannian Kurdyka–Łojasiewicz property. This mission covers the second result, Theorem 3.2.

Earlier Riemannian proximal methods either required the exponential map and parallel transport, or solved a Euclidean proximal problem in the ambient space (Chen, Ma, So, Zhang 2020, ManPG). Theorem 3.2 is stated for a general retraction, with an explicit constant.

Setting

Let M\mathcal MM be a finite-dimensional Riemannian manifold, with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩x\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle_x⟨⋅,⋅⟩x​ and norm ∥⋅∥x\|\cdot\|_x∥⋅∥x​ on each tangent space TxMT_x\mathcal MTx​M. A retraction is a family of smooth maps Rx:TxM→MR_x:T_x\mathcal M\to\mathcal MRx​:Tx​M→M with Rx(0x)=xR_x(0_x)=xRx​(0x​)=x and DRx(0x)=id\mathrm DR_x(0_x)=\mathrm{id}DRx​(0x​)=id. The problem is

min⁡x∈MF(x)=f(x)+g(x),\min_{x\in\mathcal M} F(x)=f(x)+g(x),x∈Mmin​F(x)=f(x)+g(x),

where fff is differentiable with Riemannian gradient grad⁡f\operatorname{grad} fgradf, and ggg is continuous and possibly nonsmooth.

For a function hhh on a real inner-product space VVV, the Clarke generalized directional derivative is h∘(η;v)=lim sup⁡ξ→η, t↓0(h(ξ+tv)−h(ξ))/th^\circ(\eta;v)=\limsup_{\xi\to\eta,\,t\downarrow0}(h(\xi+tv)-h(\xi))/th∘(η;v)=limsupξ→η,t↓0​(h(ξ+tv)−h(ξ))/t. The generalized subdifferential is ∂h(η)={ζ∣⟨ζ,v⟩≤h∘(η;v) ∀v}\partial h(\eta)=\{\zeta\mid\langle\zeta,v\rangle\le h^\circ(\eta;v)\ \forall v\}∂h(η)={ζ∣⟨ζ,v⟩≤h∘(η;v) ∀v}. A point η\etaη is stationary for hhh if 0∈∂h(η)0\in\partial h(\eta)0∈∂h(η).

Given a constant L~\tilde LL~, the RPG method (Algorithm 1) produces iterates xkx_kxk​ and steps ηxk∗∈TxkM\eta^*_{x_k}\in T_{x_k}\mathcal Mηxk​∗​∈Txk​​M as follows. Set

ℓxk(η)=⟨grad⁡f(xk),η⟩xk+L~2∥η∥xk2+g(Rxk(η)).\ell_{x_k}(\eta)=\langle\operatorname{grad} f(x_k),\eta\rangle_{x_k}+\frac{\tilde L}{2}\|\eta\|_{x_k}^2+g(R_{x_k}(\eta)).ℓxk​​(η)=⟨gradf(xk​),η⟩xk​​+2L~​∥η∥xk​2​+g(Rxk​​(η)).

Choose a stationary point ηxk∗\eta^*_{x_k}ηxk​∗​ of ℓxk\ell_{x_k}ℓxk​​ on TxkMT_{x_k}\mathcal MTxk​​M with ℓxk(0)≥ℓxk(ηxk∗)\ell_{x_k}(0)\ge\ell_{x_k}(\eta^*_{x_k})ℓxk​​(0)≥ℓxk​​(ηxk​∗​), and set xk+1=Rxk(ηxk∗)x_{k+1}=R_{x_k}(\eta^*_{x_k})xk+1​=Rxk​​(ηxk​∗​).

The assumptions involve the sublevel set Ωx0={x∣F(x)≤F(x0)}\Omega_{x_0}=\{x\mid F(x)\le F(x_0)\}Ωx0​​={x∣F(x)≤F(x0​)} and two notions defined with respect to RRR on a set N\mathcal NN:

  • LLL-retraction-smoothness: h(Rx(η))≤h(x)+⟨grad⁡h(x),η⟩x+L2∥η∥x2h(R_x(\eta))\le h(x)+\langle\operatorname{grad} h(x),\eta\rangle_x+\frac L2\|\eta\|_x^2h(Rx​(η))≤h(x)+⟨gradh(x),η⟩x​+2L​∥η∥x2​;
  • retraction-convexity: qx=h∘Rxq_x=h\circ R_xqx​=h∘Rx​ satisfies qx(η)≥qx(ξ)+⟨ζ,η−ξ⟩xq_x(\eta)\ge q_x(\xi)+\langle\zeta,\eta-\xi\rangle_xqx​(η)≥qx​(ξ)+⟨ζ,η−ξ⟩x​, where ζ\zetaζ is the gradient of qxq_xqx​ at ξ\xiξ, or any Riemannian subgradient of qxq_xqx​ at ξ\xiξ when hhh is nonsmooth.

Assumption 3.1 asks that FFF be bounded below and Ωx0\Omega_{x_0}Ωx0​​ compact. Assumption 3.3 provides an open Ω⊇Ωx0\Omega\supseteq\Omega_{x_0}Ω⊇Ωx0​​ on which fff is LLL-retraction-smooth and retraction-convex and ggg is retraction-convex. Assumption 3.4 bounds how far the retraction is from Euclidean: for all x,y,z∈Ωx,y,z\in\Omegax,y,z∈Ω,

∣∥Rx−1(z)−Rx−1(y)∥x2−∥Ry−1(z)∥y2∣≤κΩ∥Rx−1(y)∥x2.\bigl|\|R_x^{-1}(z)-R_x^{-1}(y)\|_x^2-\|R_y^{-1}(z)\|_y^2\bigr|\le\kappa_\Omega\|R_x^{-1}(y)\|_x^2 .​∥Rx−1​(z)−Rx−1​(y)∥x2​−∥Ry−1​(z)∥y2​​≤κΩ​∥Rx−1​(y)∥x2​.

Finally, β=(L~−L)/2\beta=(\tilde L-L)/2β=(L~−L)/2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

Let L~>max⁡(L,0)\tilde L>\max(L,0)L~>max(L,0), suppose Assumptions 3.1, 3.3 and 3.4 hold, and let x∗x_*x∗​ be any accumulation point of {xk}\{x_k\}{xk​}. Then for every k≥1k\ge1k≥1

F(xk)−F(x∗)≤1k(L~2∥Rx0−1(x∗)∥x02+L~κΩ2β(F(x0)−F(x∗))).(3.16)F(x_k)-F(x_*)\le\frac1k\left(\frac{\tilde L}{2}\|R_{x_0}^{-1}(x_*)\|_{x_0}^2+\frac{\tilde L\kappa_\Omega}{2\beta}\bigl(F(x_0)-F(x_*)\bigr)\right).\tag{3.16}F(xk​)−F(x∗​)≤k1​(2L~​∥Rx0​−1​(x∗​)∥x0​2​+2βL~κΩ​​(F(x0​)−F(x∗​))).(3.16)

The constants are those of the paper.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.1 (descent): F(xk)−F(xk+1)≥β∥ηxk∗∥xk2F(x_k)-F(x_{k+1})\ge\beta\|\eta^*_{x_k}\|_{x_k}^2F(xk​)−F(xk+1​)≥β∥ηxk​∗​∥xk​2​.
  2. Lemma 3.4 (Riemannian three-point inequality): for one step z=Rx(ηx∗)z=R_x(\eta^*_x)z=Rx​(ηx∗​) and any y=Rx(ξx)∈Ωy=R_x(\xi_x)\in\Omegay=Rx​(ξx​)∈Ω, F(z)≤F(y)+L~2(∥ξx∥x2−∥ξx−ηx∗∥x2)F(z)\le F(y)+\frac{\tilde L}{2}(\|\xi_x\|_x^2-\|\xi_x-\eta^*_x\|_x^2)F(z)≤F(y)+2L~​(∥ξx​∥x2​−∥ξx​−ηx∗​∥x2​).
  3. (3.17): the one-step estimate obtained from Lemma 3.4 with y=x∗y=x_*y=x∗​ and from Assumption 3.4.
  4. (3.18): the one-step estimate with ∥ηxk∗∥2\|\eta^*_{x_k}\|^2∥ηxk​∗​∥2 replaced by the decrease of FFF.
  5. (3.19): the averaged estimate over the first kkk steps.

Significance

Theorem 3.2 extends the O(1/k)O(1/k)O(1/k) function-value rate of the proximal gradient method to manifolds and general retractions. The constant is explicit: it combines the initial distance ∥Rx0−1(x∗)∥\|R_{x_0}^{-1}(x_*)\|∥Rx0​−1​(x∗​)∥ with a correction proportional to κΩ\kappa_\OmegaκΩ​, which measures how far the retraction is from Euclidean. In the Euclidean case Rx(η)=x+ηR_x(\eta)=x+\etaRx​(η)=x+η one can take κΩ=0\kappa_\Omega=0κΩ​=0, and the bound reduces to the classical one. The rate concerns F(xk)−F(x∗)F(x_k)-F(x_*)F(xk​)−F(x∗​), which the iteration bound of Theorem 3.1 (the norm of ηxk∗\eta^*_{x_k}ηxk​∗​) does not control.

The result is proved in the paper. None of it is formalized, and no machine-checked version of the Euclidean proximal-gradient rate is on the platform either. A formalization would supply the first checked version of Clarke stationarity on tangent spaces, of the retraction-based convexity and smoothness notions, and of a rate proof for a nonsmooth Riemannian algorithm. These pieces carry over to other retraction-based methods, such as the accelerated variants of §4 of the paper.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of the rate proof is a telescoping sum, so the work lies elsewhere. First, Lemma 3.4 needs a usable form of the stationarity condition 0∈∂ℓx(ηx∗)0\in\partial\ell_x(\eta^*_x)0∈∂ℓx​(ηx∗​): a subgradient of g∘Rxg\circ R_xg∘Rx​ at ηx∗\eta^*_xηx∗​ equal to −(grad⁡f(x)+L~ηx∗)-(\operatorname{grad} f(x)+\tilde L\eta^*_x)−(gradf(x)+L~ηx∗​). This requires a sum rule for the Clarke subdifferential of a C1C^1C1 function plus a locally Lipschitz one, on a tangent space whose norm comes from the Riemannian metric rather than from the model space. Second, the gradient of f∘Rxf\circ R_xf∘Rx​ at 0x0_x0x​ has to be identified with grad⁡f(x)\operatorname{grad} f(x)gradf(x) through DRx(0x)=id\mathrm DR_x(0_x)=\mathrm{id}DRx​(0x​)=id. In Mathlib this mixes manifold derivatives (mfderiv) with Fréchet derivatives on a space carrying two equivalent norms. Third, it has to be shown that the iterates and the accumulation point remain in Ω\OmegaΩ, so that Assumptions 3.3 and 3.4 apply at every step.

Formalization scope

Theorem numbers and pages are those of arXiv:1909.06065v4. M\mathcal MM is a smooth manifold modelled on a finite-dimensional real inner-product space EEE, with Mathlib's RiemannianBundle on the tangent bundle. All norms and inner products on TxMT_x\mathcal MTx​M are the Riemannian ones. Retractions and gradients are the published RiemOpt.BFGS.IsRetraction and RiemOpt.FR.IsGradient. The Clarke derivative is an EReal-valued limit superior along N(η)×N>0(0)\mathcal N(\eta)\times\mathcal N_{>0}(0)N(η)×N>0​(0). Algorithm 1 is modelled as a run (sequences xkx_kxk​, ηxk∗\eta^*_{x_k}ηxk​∗​ with the three defining properties), and every statement holds for every run. Indices start at 000, accumulation points are cluster points of the sequence, and the bounds divided by kkk are stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1.

The formalization commits to the following readings:

  1. LLL-retraction-smoothness is required for every tangent vector at the points of the set. This is a strengthening of Definition 3.1, which only covers η\etaη with Rx(η)R_x(\eta)Rx​(η) in the set, and it is needed because Lemma 3.1 fails under the literal reading.
  2. In retraction-convexity the vector ζ\zetaζ depends on ξ\xiξ. It is the gradient of f∘Rxf\circ R_xf∘Rx​, respectively any Clarke subgradient of g∘Rxg\circ R_xg∘Rx​, as the sentence after (3.10) states.
  3. κΩ\kappa_\OmegaκΩ​ is a single constant.
  4. R−1R^{-1}R−1 is data with Rx(Rx−1(y))=yR_x(R_x^{-1}(y))=yRx​(Rx−1​(y))=y on Ω\OmegaΩ, together with the identification Rxk−1(xk+1)=ηxk∗R_{x_k}^{-1}(x_{k+1})=\eta^*_{x_k}Rxk​−1​(xk+1​)=ηxk​∗​ that the proof uses.
  5. Local Lipschitz continuity of g∘Rxg\circ R_xg∘Rx​ is assumed, as p. 5 presupposes when it defines the subdifferential.

A single ζ\zetaζ for all η,ξ\eta,\xiη,ξ in (3.10) would make retraction-convexity force qxq_xqx​ to be affine, and the theorem would only cover affine problems. That reading is excluded. Statements with the case k=0k=0k=0, where Lean's 1/0=01/0=01/0=0 makes (3.16) false, are excluded as well.

Contributions welcome: a Clarke sum rule for C1C^1C1 plus locally Lipschitz functions, the identification of the Fréchet derivative of f∘Rxf\circ R_xf∘Rx​ at 000 with the Riemannian gradient, and the five milestones in order. The Clarke layer and the derivative identification are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • W. Huang, K. Wei, Riemannian proximal gradient methods, Mathematical Programming, 2021; extended version arXiv:1909.06065v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.06065v4, https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-021-01632-3
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sciences, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • S. Chen, S. Ma, A. M.-C. So, T. Zhang, Proximal gradient method for nonsmooth optimization over the Stiefel manifold, SIAM J. Optimization, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1137/18M122457X
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • P.-A. Absil, R. Mahony, R. Sepulchre, Optimization Algorithms on Matrix Manifolds, Princeton University Press, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400830244
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster Convergence Rates of Relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM Under Regularity Assumptions III: With Lipschitz ∇g and Small Stepsize, the DRS Objective Error Is O(1/(k+1)) and o(1/(k+1))Research Paper

Why this rate matters

Douglas–Rachford splitting is a method for minimizing a sum of two convex functions when each function has an accessible proximal operator. Its iterates are easy to state, but the speed of convergence of the objective at an individual proximal point is less immediate than convergence of an averaged point or of a residual. For optimization models in which one summand has a Lipschitz continuous gradient, Davis and Yin give explicit objective-error bounds that depend on the proximal stepsize. Their paper compares these bounds with forward–backward splitting and shows that DRS has an objective rate at least as fast when the stepsize is sufficiently small.

The present mission formalizes the rate in Theorem 3.2 and the Appendix B estimates that state the relevant contraction, monotonicity and summability properties. The companion Theorem 3.3 concerns the squared fixed-point residual. Both results are proved in the 2015 arXiv version of the paper, which fixes the numbering and constants used here; the journal article appeared in Mathematics of Operations Research in 2017.

The DRS setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space. Let f:H→(−∞,+∞]f:H\to(-\infty,+\infty]f:H→(−∞,+∞] be proper, lower semicontinuous and convex, and let g:H→Rg:H\to\mathbb Rg:H→R be convex and differentiable with a (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient for some β>0\beta>0β>0. The proximal map of a function hhh at stepsize γ>0\gamma>0γ>0 sends zzz to the minimizer of h(x)+∥x−z∥2/(2γ)h(x)+\|x-z\|^2/(2\gamma)h(x)+∥x−z∥2/(2γ). Write Pf=prox⁡γfP_f=\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma f}Pf​=proxγf​ and Pg=prox⁡γgP_g=\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}Pg​=proxγg​, and let RP=2P−IR_P=2P-IRP​=2P−I be the reflection associated with a proximal map PPP.

The Peaceman–Rachford map is TPRS=RPf∘RPgT_{\mathrm{PRS}}=R_{P_f}\circ R_{P_g}TPRS​=RPf​​∘RPg​​. The DRS run is the relaxed PRS run with relaxation parameter 1/21/21/2 at every step:

zk+1=12zk+12TPRS(zk),xgk=Pg(zk),xfk=Pf(RPg(zk)).z^{k+1}=\tfrac12z^k+\tfrac12T_{\mathrm{PRS}}(z^k),\qquad x_g^k=P_g(z^k),\qquad x_f^k=P_f(R_{P_g}(z^k)).zk+1=21​zk+21​TPRS​(zk),xgk​=Pg​(zk),xfk​=Pf​(RPg​​(zk)).

Equivalently, zk+1=zk+xfk−xgkz^{k+1}=z^k+x_f^k-x_g^kzk+1=zk+xfk​−xgk​. The initial z0∈Hz^0\in Hz0∈H is arbitrary. Let z∗z^*z∗ be a fixed point of TPRST_{\mathrm{PRS}}TPRS​, and put x∗=Pg(z∗)x^*=P_g(z^*)x∗=Pg​(z∗). The objective value compared in this mission is at xfkx_f^kxfk​ for both summands: ek=f(xfk)+g(xfk)−f(x∗)−g(x∗)e_k=f(x_f^k)+g(x_f^k)-f(x^*)-g(x^*)ek​=f(xfk​)+g(xfk​)−f(x∗)−g(x∗). These values are finite under the standing assumptions. The section's Assumption 5 requires the smoothness of ggg and constant relaxation 1/21/21/2; it applies to Theorems 3.2 and 3.3 even though their own sentences do not repeat it.

Formalization targets

Objective error: Theorem 3.2

Let ρ=(1+5)/2\rho=(1+\sqrt5)/2ρ=(1+5​)/2 be the positive root of r3−2r−1=0r^3-2r-1=0r3−2r−1=0, and κ≈1.24698\kappa\approx1.24698κ≈1.24698 the positive root of r3+r2−2r−1=0r^3+r^2-2r-1=0r3+r2−2r−1=0. The first target bounds the best objective error at every k≥0k\ge0k≥0:

min⁡0≤i≤kei≤12γ(k+1){∥xg0−x∗∥2,γ<ρβ,∥xg0−x∗∥2+γ3/β−2γβ−β2β2+γ2∥z0−z∗∥2,γ≥ρβ.\min_{0\le i\le k}e_i\le\frac{1}{2\gamma(k+1)}\begin{cases}\|x_g^0-x^*\|^2,&\gamma<\rho\beta,\\\|x_g^0-x^*\|^2+\dfrac{\gamma^3/\beta-2\gamma\beta-\beta^2}{\beta^2+\gamma^2}\|z^0-z^*\|^2,&\gamma\ge\rho\beta.\end{cases}0≤i≤kmin​ei​≤2γ(k+1)1​⎩⎨⎧​∥xg0​−x∗∥2,∥xg0​−x∗∥2+β2+γ2γ3/β−2γβ−β2​∥z0−z∗∥2,​γ<ρβ,γ≥ρβ.​

For every γ>0\gamma>0γ>0, this best error is o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1)). When γ<κβ\gamma<\kappa\betaγ<κβ, the same first-case upper bound holds for each eke_kek​, and ek=o(1/(k+1))e_k=o(1/(k+1))ek​=o(1/(k+1)). The goal states all four clauses together. The paper prints ρ≈2.2056\rho\approx2.2056ρ≈2.2056, the positive root of r3−2r2−1r^3-2r^2-1r3−2r2−1. That threshold does not match the coefficient γ3/β−2γβ−β2\gamma^3/\beta-2\gamma\beta-\beta^2γ3/β−2γβ−β2 the proof needs to be nonpositive, and with it the first case fails: for f=0f=0f=0, g(x)=x2/(2β)g(x)=x^2/(2\beta)g(x)=x2/(2β) on R\mathbb RR, γ=2β\gamma=2\betaγ=2β and k=0k=0k=0 the error is twice the bound. The mission states the theorem with the threshold the proof supports, the positive root of r3−2r−1r^3-2r-1r3−2r−1.

Fixed-point residual: Theorem 3.3

For γ<κβ\gamma<\kappa\betaγ<κβ and k≥1k\ge1k≥1, the companion target is

∥zk−zk+1∥2≤β2∥xg0−x∗∥2k2(1+γ/β)2(β2−γ2/κ2),∥zk−zk+1∥2=o(1/k2).\|z^k-z^{k+1}\|^2\le\frac{\beta^2\|x_g^0-x^*\|^2}{k^2(1+\gamma/\beta)^2(\beta^2-\gamma^2/\kappa^2)},\qquad \|z^k-z^{k+1}\|^2=o(1/k^2).∥zk−zk+1∥2≤k2(1+γ/β)2(β2−γ2/κ2)β2∥xg0​−x∗∥2​,∥zk−zk+1∥2=o(1/k2).

The Appendix B milestones give the contraction of the smooth gradient at proximal points, a fundamental one-step inequality, monotonicity, the extremal admissible stepsize ratio, and two summability bounds. Their constants and indices match the printed displays (B.1), (B.4), (B.7), (B.8), (B.10) and (B.12).

What the result supplies

The objective theorem gives a rate directly at the proximal point xfkx_f^kxfk​ when the stepsize is below the smaller threshold. Outside that regime, it still gives a best-iterate rate for every positive stepsize, including the explicit correction term for larger γ\gammaγ. The residual theorem controls the change in the DRS state at the faster squared rate. These statements let later work compare DRS against other splitting methods using the same objective and residual quantities, rather than changing the point at which the objective is measured.

The paper proves these results (Theorem 3.2 with the corrected threshold ρ\rhoρ); their statements are not new conjectures. The formalization work is to connect extended-real convex functions, actual proximal minimizers, smooth gradients, infinite sums, finite minima, and little-o assertions in a single Lean development. The seven Appendix B milestones are also useful as separately importable facts about proximal splitting. A machine-checked proof is still needed for the draft theorems of this mission.

Where the analysis is delicate

The familiar convergence of the DRS fixed-point residual does not by itself give the objective error at xfkx_f^kxfk​. An objective comparison involves the two different proximal points and the smooth gradient evaluated at successive xgkx_g^kxgk​. The large-stepsize regime changes the coefficient of the gradient increment and therefore changes the explicit bound. For the per-iterate conclusion, one must establish a monotone, summable quantity that dominates the objective error; a best-iterate estimate alone does not yield the stated nonergodic little-o claim. This explains why the mission retains the Appendix B estimates rather than replacing the goal with a generic O(1/k)O(1/k)O(1/k) statement.

Formalization scope

The Lean carrier is a complete real inner-product space. The proper, closed, convex predicate for fff and the proximal-map predicate are imported from the published ThreeOpSplitting.ConvexRates.Problem definition; the published MoreauProx.Characterization.GammaZero supplies the subgradient notion used by the paper's surrounding analysis. The smooth ggg is a real-valued function, with its actual gradient supplied by Mathlib's gradient and constrained by the imported smoothness predicate. Each proximal map is a function with the defining minimization property; the theorems do not assume an arbitrary map can stand in for a prox.

The fixed point z∗z^*z∗ is an explicit hypothesis, as in the paper. The two root constants are positive real numbers satisfying their defining cubics, never decimal approximations. A finite minimum ranges over i=0,…,ki=0,\ldots,ki=0,…,k; infinite sums come with summability; asymptotic claims use genuine little-o. The k≥1k\ge1k≥1 condition protects the k2k^2k2 denominator in Theorem 3.3. The objective error is taken at xfkx_f^kxfk​, never at xgkx_g^kxgk​, and the goal contains no auxiliary monotonicity or summability assumption that would assert part of its proof. Further contributions that establish proximal finiteness, the Appendix B inequalities, and the rates themselves fit within this scope.

Selected references

  • Damek Davis and Wotao Yin, Faster convergence rates of relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM under regularity assumptions, Mathematics of Operations Research 42(3), 2017. arXiv:1407.5210v3; DOI:10.1287/moor.2016.0827.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment I: With Endogenous Uniform Quality, an Encroaching Manufacturer Gains and the Retailer Always LosesResearch Paper

Motivation

Manufacturers increasingly sell directly to consumers through their own stores and websites, alongside the independent retailers that carry their products. This practice is called supply chain encroachment. Retailers routinely resent it, and examples range from beer brewers to personal computers. Arya, Mittendorf and Sappington (Marketing Science, 2007) showed that, when product quality is fixed, encroachment can benefit the retailer too: the manufacturer lowers the wholesale price to keep the retailer channel competitive, and this wholesale price effect can outweigh the lost sales.

Ha, Long and Nasiry (Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2016; authors' manuscript SSRN 3970373) ask what changes when the manufacturer also chooses product quality. Their first result, formalized in this mission, is that the win–win outcome disappears: with endogenous quality and a single product sold in both channels, encroachment always helps the manufacturer and always hurts the retailer.

Setting

Consumers have a quality sensitivity θ\thetaθ uniformly distributed on [0,1][0,1][0,1], and a consumer who buys a product of quality u>0u>0u>0 at price ppp obtains surplus θu−p\theta u-pθu−p. When one product of quality uuu is sold in total quantity qqq, the market-clearing price is p=u(1−q)p=u(1-q)p=u(1−q). The manufacturer's unit production cost for quality uuu is ku2ku^2ku2, with k>0k>0k>0 the cost of quality. Selling one unit through her own direct channel costs her an additional c≥0c\ge 0c≥0; the retailer's selling cost is 000.

Benchmark (no direct channel). The manufacturer chooses a wholesale price www and a quality uuu; after observing them the retailer orders qR≥0q_R\ge 0qR​≥0. The profits are

ΠRN=(u(1−qR)−w) qR,ΠMN=(w−ku2) qR.\Pi^N_R=(u(1-q_R)-w)\,q_R,\qquad \Pi^N_M=(w-ku^2)\,q_R .ΠRN​=(u(1−qR​)−w)qR​,ΠMN​=(w−ku2)qR​.

Encroachment with uniform quality. The game has three stages and perfect information:

  1. the manufacturer chooses www and uuu;
  2. the retailer, having observed them, orders qR≥0q_R\ge 0qR​≥0;
  3. the manufacturer, having observed qRq_RqR​, sells qM≥0q_M\ge 0qM​≥0 directly.

Both channels sell the same product at the price u(1−qR−qM)u(1-q_R-q_M)u(1−qR​−qM​), so

ΠRU=(u(1−qR−qM)−w) qR,ΠMU=(w−ku2) qR+(u−uqM−uqR−c−ku2) qM.\Pi^U_R=(u(1-q_R-q_M)-w)\,q_R,\qquad \Pi^U_M=(w-ku^2)\,q_R+(u-uq_M-uq_R-c-ku^2)\,q_M .ΠRU​=(u(1−qR​−qM​)−w)qR​,ΠMU​=(w−ku2)qR​+(u−uqM​−uqR​−c−ku2)qM​.

The solution concept is subgame perfect equilibrium: at every decision node, on or off the equilibrium path, the mover's rule picks a feasible action that no feasible alternative beats. The manufacturer encroaches when qMU>0q^U_M>0qMU​>0 on the equilibrium path.

In the Lean development these are the structures Outcome and Profile, the payoffs retailerPayoff and mfrPayoff k c, and the predicate IsSPE k c σ of the definition QualityEncroach.Uniform.Game, with the benchmark counterparts BenchProfile and IsBenchSPE k τ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 1(iii)

In the benchmark, every equilibrium has uN=13ku^N=\tfrac1{3k}uN=3k1​ and profits ΠMN=154k\Pi^N_M=\tfrac1{54k}ΠMN​=54k1​, ΠRN=1108k\Pi^N_R=\tfrac1{108k}ΠRN​=108k1​. The goal states that, for every k>0k>0k>0, c≥0c\ge0c≥0 and every subgame perfect equilibrium of the encroachment game in which the manufacturer encroaches,

ΠMU>154k=ΠMNandΠRU<1108k=ΠRN.\Pi^U_M>\frac{1}{54k}=\Pi^N_M\qquad\text{and}\qquad \Pi^U_R<\frac1{108k}=\Pi^N_R .ΠMU​>54k1​=ΠMN​andΠRU​<108k1​=ΠRN​.

The statement fixes no threshold value, and it holds for every equilibrium.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's backward induction:

  1. the benchmark subgame, equations (1)–(2), and the benchmark equilibrium (§3.2);
  2. the manufacturer's stage-3 best response qMU(qR,w,u)=(12−qR2−c2u−ku2)+q^U_M(q_R,w,u)=\big(\tfrac12-\tfrac{q_R}{2}-\tfrac{c}{2u}-\tfrac{ku}{2}\big)^+qMU​(qR​,w,u)=(21​−2qR​​−2uc​−2ku​)+;
  3. the quantity subgame (3) and the optimal wholesale price and profits (4)–(5) for a given quality;
  4. the three-case optimal profit ΠM(u)\Pi_M(u)ΠM​(u) of the Appendix, covering three regimes: the manufacturer sells directly, the retailer deters direct sales exactly, or the direct channel is idle;
  5. Proposition 1(i): there is a threshold c~>0\tilde c>0c~>0 such that
c<c~ ⇒ qMU>0,c>c~ ⇒ qMU=0.c<\tilde c\ \Rightarrow\ q^U_M>0,\qquad c>\tilde c\ \Rightarrow\ q^U_M=0 .c<c~ ⇒ qMU​>0,c>c~ ⇒ qMU​=0.

Further statements

The mission also contains:

  • condition (6) for a fixed quality, together with the identity wN(u)−wU(u)=c/6w^N(u)-w^U(u)=c/6wN(u)−wU(u)=c/6;
  • Proposition 1(ii): the equilibrium quality first rises and then falls in ccc, and it is distorted upward exactly below a threshold cuc^ucu;
  • Corollary 1: c~\tilde cc~ is decreasing in kkk, and for c>0c>0c>0 the retailer's profit under encroachment is increasing in kkk;
  • existence of a subgame perfect equilibrium.

Significance

The result separates two regimes that look alike. With quality fixed, a retailer facing an encroaching manufacturer is better off exactly when condition (6) holds. With quality chosen by the manufacturer, that region disappears. The manufacturer distorts quality, upward when ccc is small and downward when it is large, and so relies less on the wholesale price to steer the retailer's order. The retailer then loses in every equilibrium in which encroachment occurs. The paper's later sections (quality differentiation, a fixed cost of quality, no quality commitment, a general cost function) all measure against this base case.

The result is proved on paper, by backward induction with closed-form profits, an envelope-theorem convexity argument in ccc, and a numerically located threshold c~≈0.1019/k\tilde c\approx0.1019/kc~≈0.1019/k. None of it is formalized. A machine-checked proof would certify:

  • the closed-form reduced profits;
  • the case analysis of the Appendix, whose boundaries are given by roots of polynomial equations in uuu;
  • the claim, stated in the paper only for the reduced problem, that it holds for every subgame perfect equilibrium of the game.

Difficulty

Each step of the backward induction is a one-variable concave problem, but the steps do not compose into a single smooth problem. The retailer's best order depends on whether his order leaves room for direct sales. As a result the manufacturer's profit given uuu is the piecewise function ΠM(u)\Pi_M(u)ΠM​(u). Its middle piece describes a retailer who orders exactly enough to keep the manufacturer out, and that piece is not a stationary point of anything. The global optimum over uuu switches between the first piece and the other two at a threshold c~\tilde cc~ that the paper locates only numerically.

The goal compares the optimum of this piecewise problem with a constant, for every equilibrium. The natural first idea, comparing the reduced profits with the benchmark ones pointwise in uuu, does not work for the retailer: for a fixed quality his encroachment profit 2c2/(9u)2c^2/(9u)2c2/(9u) exceeds the benchmark profit u(1−ku)2/16u(1-ku)^2/16u(1−ku)2/16 on part of the range, which is exactly condition (6). The comparison has to use the quality the manufacturer actually chooses, and that quality is known only through the case analysis above.

Formalization scope

All quantities are real numbers. The following conventions are fixed:

  • the wholesale price ranges over all of R\mathbb RR, since the paper states no sign restriction;
  • qualities are u>0u>0u>0 and quantities qR,qM≥0q_R,q_M\ge0qR​,qM​≥0;
  • the inverse demand u(1−qR−qM)u(1-q_R-q_M)u(1−qR​−qM​) is used for all nonnegative quantities, as in the paper.

Subgame perfection is written in one-shot-deviation form at every history, which in this three-stage game with perfect information is subgame perfection. It constrains the retailer's rule at every (w,u)(w,u)(w,u) and the manufacturer's stage-3 rule at every (w,u,qR)(w,u,q_R)(w,u,qR​), not only on the path.

The benchmark profits in the goal are the paper's constants 1/(54k)1/(54k)1/(54k) and 1/(108k)1/(108k)1/(108k). The milestone benchmark_equilibrium proves that a benchmark equilibrium exists and that these are its profits.

Two formalizations would trivialize the goal, and both are ruled out:

  • stating the goal about the reduced form ΠMU\Pi^U_MΠMU​ at a maximizer of ΠM(u)\Pi_M(u)ΠM​(u) instead of about the game would assume the backward induction;
  • dropping the off-path optimality conditions would let the goal range over non-equilibria.

The encroachment threshold of Proposition 1(i) is stated in both directions, with c~>0\tilde c>0c~>0 chosen before ccc. The boundary point c=c~c=\tilde cc=c~ is left open, because the paper's statements disagree there.

The closed forms qRNq^N_RqRN​, wNw^NwN, ΠMN\Pi^N_MΠMN​, ΠRN\Pi^N_RΠRN​, qMUq^U_MqMU​, qRUq^U_RqRU​, wUw^UwU, ΠMU\Pi^U_MΠMU​, ΠRU\Pi^U_RΠRU​, ΠMUZ\Pi^{UZ}_MΠMUZ​ and ΠM\Pi_MΠM​ are definitions that cite their page. Every statement that uses one with uuu in a denominator assumes u>0u>0u>0.

A complete development needs:

  • concave quadratic maximization;
  • a piecewise-concave best-response lemma;
  • the envelope argument of the Appendix, or a direct polynomial comparison;
  • some way to certify the numerically located thresholds, for which interval arithmetic or explicit polynomial sign certificates are both acceptable.

The game definitions are reusable for the other missions of this series, which keep this cost structure. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative arguments for the goal that bypass the threshold computation.

Selected references

  • A. Ha, X. Long, J. Nasiry, Quality in Supply Chain Encroachment, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 18(2), 2016. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2015.0562 (authors' manuscript: https://ssrn.com/abstract=3970373)
  • A. Arya, B. Mittendorf, D. E. M. Sappington, The Bright Side of Supplier Encroachment, Marketing Science 26(5): 651–659, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.1070.0280
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster Convergence Rates of Relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM Under Regularity Assumptions II: With One Lipschitz Gradient, the Best Relaxed PRS Objective Error Is o(1/(k+1))Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, statistics and machine learning ask to minimise a sum f+gf + gf+g of two convex functions, each of which is easy to handle on its own through its proximal operator but not jointly. Operator-splitting methods exploit exactly that structure. The Douglas–Rachford (DRS) and Peaceman–Rachford (PRS) splitting schemes, introduced for linear equations in the 1950s and extended to maximal monotone operators by Lions and Mercier (1979), are the classical examples; applied to the dual of a linearly constrained problem, DRS is the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) of Gabay and Mercier (1976).

Convergence of these methods has been known for decades, but convergence rates in terms of the objective value were established only recently. Davis and Yin (arXiv:1406.4834) showed that for general convex f,gf, gf,g the objective error of relaxed PRS converges at the nonergodic rate o(1/k+1)o(1/\sqrt{k+1})o(1/k+1​), and that this is sharp. The paper behind this mission (arXiv:1407.5210v3) asks how much faster the method becomes when fff or ggg is more regular. Its Theorem 3.1 answers the question for the case of one smooth function: the best objective error found in the first kkk iterations is o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1)), for any stepsize. This matches the rate of forward–backward splitting (FBS), the method one would otherwise use when one of the two functions is smooth, without FBS's stepsize restriction.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space and let f,g:H→(−∞,∞]f, g : \mathcal H \to (-\infty, \infty]f,g:H→(−∞,∞] be closed, proper and convex. For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 the proximal operator is

proxγf(x)=arg⁡min⁡y∈H f(y)+12γ∥y−x∥2,\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma f}(x) = \arg\min_{y \in \mathcal H}\ f(y) + \tfrac{1}{2\gamma}\|y - x\|^2,proxγf​(x)=argy∈Hmin​ f(y)+2γ1​∥y−x∥2,

the reflection is reflγf=2 proxγf−IH\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma f} = 2\,\mathbf{prox}_{\gamma f} - I_{\mathcal H}reflγf​=2proxγf​−IH​, and the PRS operator is TPRS=reflγf∘reflγgT_{\mathrm{PRS}} = \mathbf{refl}_{\gamma f}\circ\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma g}TPRS​=reflγf​∘reflγg​. For λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 write (TPRS)λ=(1−λ)IH+λTPRS(T_{\mathrm{PRS}})_\lambda = (1-\lambda) I_{\mathcal H} + \lambda T_{\mathrm{PRS}}(TPRS​)λ​=(1−λ)IH​+λTPRS​.

Relaxed PRS (Algorithm 1) starts from any z0∈Hz^0 \in \mathcal Hz0∈H and iterates

zk+1=(1−λk)zk+λk reflγf∘reflγg(zk),λk∈(0,1].z^{k+1} = (1 - \lambda_k) z^k + \lambda_k\, \mathbf{refl}_{\gamma f}\circ\mathbf{refl}_{\gamma g}(z^k), \qquad \lambda_k \in (0,1].zk+1=(1−λk​)zk+λk​reflγf​∘reflγg​(zk),λk​∈(0,1].

The choice λk≡1/2\lambda_k \equiv 1/2λk​≡1/2 is DRS and λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1 is PRS. Each step computes two auxiliary points,

xgk=proxγg(zk),xfk=proxγf(2xgk−zk),x_g^k = \mathbf{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^k), \qquad x_f^k = \mathbf{prox}_{\gamma f}(2x_g^k - z^k),xgk​=proxγg​(zk),xfk​=proxγf​(2xgk​−zk),

which are the method's candidate solutions. If z∗z^*z∗ is a fixed point of TPRST_{\mathrm{PRS}}TPRS​, then x∗=proxγg(z∗)x^* = \mathbf{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^*)x∗=proxγg​(z∗) minimises f+gf + gf+g. The objective error at a point xxx is f(x)+g(x)−f(x∗)−g(x∗)f(x) + g(x) - f(x^*) - g(x^*)f(x)+g(x)−f(x∗)−g(x∗).

A function has a (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient (β>0\beta > 0β>0) if it is real-valued and differentiable and ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤1β∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x) - \nabla f(y)\| \le \frac1\beta\|x - y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤β1​∥x−y∥ for all x,yx, yx,y.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 10)

Suppose τ‾=inf⁡j≥0λj(1−λj)>0\underline\tau = \inf_{j\ge0}\lambda_j(1-\lambda_j) > 0τ​=infj≥0​λj​(1−λj​)>0. If ∇f\nabla f∇f is (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz and xk=xgkx^k = x_g^kxk=xgk​, or if ∇g\nabla g∇g is (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz and xk=xfkx^k = x_f^kxk=xfk​, then

min⁡i=0,…,k{f(xi)+g(xi)−f(x∗)−g(x∗)}=o(1k+1).\min_{i=0,\dots,k}\big\{f(x^i) + g(x^i) - f(x^*) - g(x^*)\big\} = o\Big(\frac{1}{k+1}\Big).i=0,…,kmin​{f(xi)+g(xi)−f(x∗)−g(x∗)}=o(k+11​).

Both cases are part of the goal. The statement fixes no constants: it asserts only the order of the best-iterate error, so it holds for every stepsize γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0.

Milestones

  • Theorem A.1 (p. 31): the descent inequality and the Baillon–Haddad cocoercivity inequality for a convex function with a (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient.
  • Lemma 1.1 (p. 7): the relaxed PRS step written through the prox subgradients ∇~g(xg)=(z−xg)/γ∈∂g(xg)\widetilde\nabla g(x_g) = (z - x_g)/\gamma \in \partial g(x_g)∇g(xg​)=(z−xg​)/γ∈∂g(xg​) and ∇~f(xf)∈∂f(xf)\widetilde\nabla f(x_f) \in \partial f(x_f)∇f(xf​)∈∂f(xf​).
  • Lemma C.1 (p. 35): the optimality conditions of TPRST_{\mathrm{PRS}}TPRS​, (C.1)–(C.2).
  • Inequality (1.16) (p. 8), the upper fundamental inequality at x∗x^*x∗, in the form with one Lipschitz gradient.
  • Proposition 3.1 (p. 10): 4γλ4\gamma\lambda4γλ times the objective error is bounded by a telescoping term plus a multiple of ∥z−z+∥2\|z - z^+\|^2∥z−z+∥2, with the constant depending on whether γ≤β\gamma \le \betaγ≤β.
  • Fact 1.2 Part 5 (p. 7): ∑iλi(1−λi)∥TPRSzi−zi∥2≤∥z0−z∗∥2\sum_i \lambda_i(1-\lambda_i)\|T_{\mathrm{PRS}}z^i - z^i\|^2 \le \|z^0 - z^*\|^2∑i​λi​(1−λi​)∥TPRS​zi−zi∥2≤∥z0−z∗∥2.
  • Fact 1.1 Part 3 (p. 6): the best entry of a sequence with ∑iλiai<∞\sum_i\lambda_i a_i < \infty∑i​λi​ai​<∞ is nonincreasing and is o(1/(Λk−Λ⌈k/2⌉))o(1/(\Lambda_k - \Lambda_{\lceil k/2\rceil}))o(1/(Λk​−Λ⌈k/2⌉​)).

A companion item states the explicit bounds of the proof of Theorem 3.1 (p. 11), of the form ∥z0−z∗∥2/(4γλ‾(k+1))\|z^0 - z^*\|^2/(4\gamma\underline\lambda(k+1))∥z0−z∗∥2/(4γλ​(k+1)) times a case-dependent factor.

Significance

The result separates relaxed PRS from FBS. FBS needs γ<2β\gamma < 2\betaγ<2β to converge, so it needs the Lipschitz constant of the gradient, or a line search to estimate it. Theorem 3.1 says relaxed PRS reaches the same o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1)) best-iterate order for every γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0, and the companion bounds show how the constant depends on γ/β\gamma/\betaγ/β. The theorem and its explicit bounds are part of the paper's catalogue of rates (its Tables 1.1–1.2), which records how the rates of relaxed PRS and ADMM improve under regularity.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as is known, none of these statements is machine-checked. Formalizing it means building the prox calculus for extended-valued convex functions on a Hilbert space (Lemma 1.1, Lemma C.1), the descent and cocoercivity inequalities for smooth convex functions (Theorem A.1), the Fejér-type summability of the fixed-point residual of averaged nonexpansive maps (Fact 1.2), and the summable-sequence rate lemma (Fact 1.1). Each of these is reused across operator-splitting analyses.

Difficulty

The objective errors f(xk)+g(xk)−f(x∗)−g(x∗)f(x^k) + g(x^k) - f(x^*) - g(x^*)f(xk)+g(xk)−f(x∗)−g(x∗) are nonnegative and, by Proposition 3.1 and Fact 1.2, weighted-summable. They are not monotone, however. A summable nonnegative sequence need not be o(1/k)o(1/k)o(1/k) term by term, which is why only the best iterate gets the little-o rate. A summability argument that ignores this, or that claims the rate for the last iterate, proves something false.

Proposition 3.1 is the substantive step. The upper fundamental inequality contains an inner-product term 2⟨z−z+,z∗−x∗⟩2\langle z - z^+, z^* - x^*\rangle2⟨z−z+,z∗−x∗⟩ that does not telescope, and it must be absorbed through the optimality condition (C.2) and the smoothness inequalities (A.1)–(A.2). When γ>β\gamma > \betaγ>β the residual term that remains has the wrong sign. It is controlled only by a second use of the Lipschitz gradient, through the regularity term Sf(xf,x∗)S_f(x_f, x^*)Sf​(xf​,x∗), which costs the factor 1+(γ−β)/(2β)1 + (\gamma-\beta)/(2\beta)1+(γ−β)/(2β).

Formalization scope

  • Space and functions. H\mathcal HH is a real InnerProductSpace with CompleteSpace. f,gf, gf,g are H → EReal, closed, proper and convex in the sense of the published IsProperClosedConvex. A prox map is a map PPP with the published IsProx γ f P, which for γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 determines it uniquely. The subdifferential is the published subgrad.
  • Smoothness. "∇f\nabla f∇f is (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz" means: f=hf = hf=h for a real function hhh with the published IsSmoothConvex β h (convex, Fréchet differentiable, (1/β)(1/\beta)(1/β)-Lipschitz gradient), β>0\beta > 0β>0.
  • Standing assumptions. Assumption 1 (closed, proper, convex), γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0, and λk∈(0,1]\lambda_k \in (0,1]λk​∈(0,1] (Algorithm 1) are hypotheses of every item about the method. Assumption 4 (one Lipschitz gradient) appears as the hypothesis of each case.
  • Rates. τ‾>0\underline\tau > 0τ​>0 is encoded by a positive lower bound τ≤λj(1−λj)\tau \le \lambda_j(1-\lambda_j)τ≤λj​(1−λj​), which is equivalent. "ak=o(1/(k+1))a_k = o(1/(k+1))ak​=o(1/(k+1))" is Asymptotics.IsLittleO along atTop. The best iterate is Finset.inf' over {0,…,k}\{0,\dots,k\}{0,…,k}.
  • Objective error. It is a real number computed with EReal.toReal, evaluated only where all four values are finite. These points are prox outputs of a proper function, and values of the real-valued smooth function.
  • Disclosed choices. The page's stray "Let z∈Hz \in \mathcal Hz∈H" in Theorem 3.1 is dropped. (1.16) is stated with μf=μg=0\mu_f = \mu_g = 0μf​=μg​=0 and one β\betaβ vanishing, as the paper's §1.10 convention allows. The little-o of Fact 1.1 is stated under a positive lower bound on λj\lambda_jλj​; without one, its denominator can vanish identically.
  • No trivialization. Neither "respectively" case may be dropped, and the error must sit at xgkx_g^kxgk​ (smooth fff) or xfkx_f^kxfk​ (smooth ggg). Swapping the points, adding Proposition 3.1's bound or Fact 1.1 as a hypothesis, or bounding a weaker quantity than the minimum objective error would change the theorem.

Contributions are welcome at every level: the prox calculus of Lemma 1.1 and Lemma C.1, Theorem A.1, the summability results, and the final assembly.

Selected references

  • D. Davis, W. Yin, Faster convergence rates of relaxed Peaceman-Rachford and ADMM under regularity assumptions, Math. Oper. Res. 42(3), 2017; read as arXiv:1407.5210v3. https://arxiv.org/abs/1407.5210
  • D. Davis, W. Yin, Convergence rate analysis of several splitting schemes, arXiv:1406.4834, 2014. https://arxiv.org/abs/1406.4834
  • P.-L. Lions, B. Mercier, Splitting algorithms for the sum of two nonlinear operators, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 16(6), 964–979, 1979. https://doi.org/10.1137/0716071
  • D. Gabay, B. Mercier, A dual algorithm for the solution of nonlinear variational problems via finite element approximation, Comput. Math. Appl. 2(1), 17–40, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1016/0898-1221(76)90003-1
  • H. H. Bauschke, P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, Springer, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-9467-7
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization 4: Lagrangian Duals of the Reduced Relaxation and Their Closed-Form Optimal Dual VariablesResearch Paper

Motivation

Best subset selection with ridge shrinkage, the ℓ0ℓ2\ell_0\ell_2ℓ0​ℓ2​-regularized least squares problem

min⁡β∈Rp 12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∥β∥0+λ2∥β∥22,\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}\ \tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\lambda_0\|\beta\|_0+\lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^2,β∈Rpmin​ 21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​∥β∥0​+λ2​∥β∥22​,

is a mixed integer program. Exact solvers for it rely on branch-and-bound: at every node of the search tree a convex relaxation is solved, and the node is discarded if a lower bound on that relaxation already exceeds the best objective value found so far. Hazimeh, Mazumder and Saab (arXiv:2004.06152v2, Mathematical Programming 2022) build such a solver, L0BnB, for instances with ppp in the millions. Its relaxations are solved only approximately, by first-order methods, and an approximate primal solution does not by itself certify a lower bound. The bound has to come from a dual feasible point. Theorem 2 of the paper supplies the duals of the node relaxation in closed form, together with explicit formulas for the optimal dual variables as functions of the primal optimum. Everything the paper later proves about the quality of its dual bounds (Section 3.2, Theorem 3) starts from these formulas.

Setting

Data are a matrix X∈Rn×pX\in\mathbb R^{n\times p}X∈Rn×p with columns X1,…,XpX_1,\dots,X_pX1​,…,Xp​, a response y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn, and parameters λ0,λ2,M>0\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M>0λ0​,λ2​,M>0, where MMM bounds the coefficients. Write [p]={1,…,p}[p]=\{1,\dots,p\}[p]={1,…,p} and [a]+=max⁡{a,0}[a]_+=\max\{a,0\}[a]+​=max{a,0}. The reverse Huber penalty is B(t)=∣t∣\mathcal B(t)=|t|B(t)=∣t∣ for ∣t∣≤1|t|\le1∣t∣≤1 and B(t)=(t2+1)/2\mathcal B(t)=(t^2+1)/2B(t)=(t2+1)/2 for ∣t∣≥1|t|\ge1∣t∣≥1. Define

ψ1(b)=2λ0 B(bλ2/λ0),ψ2(b)=(λ0M+λ2M)∣b∣,\psi_1(b)=2\lambda_0\,\mathcal B\big(b\sqrt{\lambda_2/\lambda_0}\big),\qquad \psi_2(b)=\Big(\frac{\lambda_0}{M}+\lambda_2M\Big)|b|,ψ1​(b)=2λ0​B(bλ2​/λ0​​),ψ2​(b)=(Mλ0​​+λ2​M)∣b∣,

and let ψ=ψ1\psi=\psi_1ψ=ψ1​ if λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M and ψ=ψ2\psi=\psi_2ψ=ψ2​ if λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M. The reduced relaxation (5) is

min⁡β∈Rp F(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i∈[p]ψ(βi)s.t.∥β∥∞≤M.\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}\ F(\beta)=\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\sum_{i\in[p]}\psi(\beta_i)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad\|\beta\|_\infty\le M.β∈Rpmin​ F(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∈[p]∑​ψ(βi​)s.t.∥β∥∞​≤M.

By Theorem 1 of the paper it is the interval relaxation of the perspective formulation, projected onto β\betaβ.

The two dual objectives of Theorem 2 are, for α,ρ∈Rn\alpha,\rho\in\mathbb R^nα,ρ∈Rn and γ,μ∈Rp\gamma,\mu\in\mathbb R^pγ,μ∈Rp,

h1(α,γ)=−12∥α∥22−αTy−∑i∈[p]v(α,γi),v(α,γi)=[(αTXi−γi)24λ2−λ0]++M∣γi∣,h_1(\alpha,\gamma)=-\tfrac12\|\alpha\|_2^2-\alpha^Ty-\sum_{i\in[p]}v(\alpha,\gamma_i),\qquad v(\alpha,\gamma_i)=\Big[\frac{(\alpha^TX_i-\gamma_i)^2}{4\lambda_2}-\lambda_0\Big]_++M|\gamma_i|,h1​(α,γ)=−21​∥α∥22​−αTy−i∈[p]∑​v(α,γi​),v(α,γi​)=[4λ2​(αTXi​−γi​)2​−λ0​]+​+M∣γi​∣, h2(ρ,μ)=−12∥ρ∥22−ρTy−M∥μ∥1,h_2(\rho,\mu)=-\tfrac12\|\rho\|_2^2-\rho^Ty-M\|\mu\|_1,h2​(ρ,μ)=−21​∥ρ∥22​−ρTy−M∥μ∥1​,

where h1h_1h1​ is maximized over all of Rn×Rp\mathbb R^n\times\mathbb R^pRn×Rp (problem (20)) and h2h_2h2​ subject to ∣ρTXi∣−μi≤λ0/M+λ2M|\rho^TX_i|-\mu_i\le\lambda_0/M+\lambda_2M∣ρTXi​∣−μi​≤λ0​/M+λ2​M for i∈[p]i\in[p]i∈[p] (problem (22)). For an optimal β∗\beta^*β∗ of (5), with residual r∗=y−Xβ∗r^*=y-X\beta^*r∗=y−Xβ∗, the candidate dual variables are

α∗=ρ∗=−r∗,γi∗=1[∣βi∗∣=M](α∗TXi−2Mλ2 sign(α∗TXi)),μi∗=1[∣βi∗∣=M](∣ρ∗TXi∣−λ0/M−λ2M).\alpha^*=\rho^*=-r^*,\qquad \gamma^*_i=\mathbb 1_{[|\beta^*_i|=M]}\big(\alpha^{*T}X_i-2M\lambda_2\,\mathrm{sign}(\alpha^{*T}X_i)\big),\qquad \mu^*_i=\mathbb 1_{[|\beta^*_i|=M]}\big(|\rho^{*T}X_i|-\lambda_0/M-\lambda_2M\big).α∗=ρ∗=−r∗,γi∗​=1[∣βi∗​∣=M]​(α∗TXi​−2Mλ2​sign(α∗TXi​)),μi∗​=1[∣βi∗​∣=M]​(∣ρ∗TXi​∣−λ0​/M−λ2​M).

In the Lean development these objects are F, box, h1, v, h2, Feas22, alphaStar, gammaStar, rhoStar, muStar in the namespace L0BnB.Duality.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (pp. 13–14)

Let β∗\beta^*β∗ minimize FFF over ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty\le M∥β∥∞​≤M.

  • If λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M:  h1(α,γ)≤F(β)\ h_1(\alpha,\gamma)\le F(\beta) h1​(α,γ)≤F(β) for all α,γ\alpha,\gammaα,γ and all feasible β\betaβ, and h1(α∗,γ∗)=F(β∗)h_1(\alpha^*,\gamma^*)=F(\beta^*)h1​(α∗,γ∗)=F(β∗).
  • If λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M:  h2(ρ,μ)≤F(β)\ h_2(\rho,\mu)\le F(\beta) h2​(ρ,μ)≤F(β) for all (ρ,μ)(\rho,\mu)(ρ,μ) feasible for (22) and all feasible β\betaβ; (ρ∗,μ∗)(\rho^*,\mu^*)(ρ∗,μ∗) is feasible for (22) and h2(ρ∗,μ∗)=F(β∗)h_2(\rho^*,\mu^*)=F(\beta^*)h2​(ρ∗,μ∗)=F(β∗).

This is "(20), respectively (22), is a dual of (5), and (23), respectively (24), are optimal dual variables", with the paper's remark that strong duality holds.

Milestones

  1. (45) For a∈Ra\in\mathbb Ra∈R, η≥0\eta\ge0η≥0 and D(b)=ψ1(b)+ab+η∣b∣D(b)=\psi_1(b)+ab+\eta|b|D(b)=ψ1​(b)+ab+η∣b∣, the point 000 (if 2λ0λ2+η−∣a∣≥02\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2}+\eta-|a|\ge02λ0​λ2​​+η−∣a∣≥0) or −λ0/λ2 sign(a)-\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\,\mathrm{sign}(a)−λ0​/λ2​​sign(a) (otherwise) minimizes DDD on ∣b∣≤λ0/λ2|b|\le\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}∣b∣≤λ0​/λ2​​.
  2. (47) If ∣a∣−η≥2λ0λ2|a|-\eta\ge2\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2}∣a∣−η≥2λ0​λ2​​, then min⁡b∈RD(b)=−14λ2(∣a∣−η)2+λ0\min_{b\in\mathbb R}D(b)=-\frac{1}{4\lambda_2}(|a|-\eta)^2+\lambda_0minb∈R​D(b)=−4λ2​1​(∣a∣−η)2+λ0​.
  3. Weak duality, the first halves of both bullets of the goal.
  4. (23) h1(α∗,γ∗)=F(β∗)h_1(\alpha^*,\gamma^*)=F(\beta^*)h1​(α∗,γ∗)=F(β∗) when λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M.
  5. (24) (ρ∗,μ∗)(\rho^*,\mu^*)(ρ∗,μ∗) feasible for (22) and h2(ρ∗,μ∗)=F(β∗)h_2(\rho^*,\mu^*)=F(\beta^*)h2​(ρ∗,μ∗)=F(β∗) when λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 turns the node relaxation of L0BnB into a pair of explicit concave maximization problems, one per regime of λ0/λ2\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}λ0​/λ2​​ versus MMM. The dual (20) is unconstrained, so any (α,γ)(\alpha,\gamma)(α,γ) gives a valid lower bound; the paper's dual bounds (25)–(28) evaluate h1h_1h1​ or h2h_2h2​ at α^=−r^\hat\alpha=-\hat rα^=−r^ built from an inexact primal solution β^\hat\betaβ^​, with the remaining variable chosen in closed form. The formulas (23)–(24) explain why this choice is right: at the exact optimum it recovers the primal value. Theorem 3 of the paper, which bounds the loss of this dual bound by a quantity depending on the support size rather than on ppp, compares v(α^,γ^i)v(\hat\alpha,\hat\gamma_i)v(α^,γ^​i​) to v(α∗,γi∗)v(\alpha^*,\gamma^*_i)v(α∗,γi∗​) term by term and therefore depends on (23).

Formalizing it. The paper proves the case λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M in Appendix A and omits the proof of the case λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M ("follows along the lines similar to what was shown above"). The appendix also contains an intermediate formula for the coordinate minimum, −[(∣αTXi∣−ηi)2/(4λ2)−λ0]+-[(|\alpha^TX_i|-\eta_i)^2/(4\lambda_2)-\lambda_0]_+−[(∣αTXi​∣−ηi​)2/(4λ2​)−λ0​]+​, that is incorrect when ηi\eta_iηi​ is large; the final dual (49) = (20) is nevertheless correct. A machine-checked proof supplies the omitted case and settles the correct statement. To our knowledge neither half has been formalized.

Difficulty

The dual objective (20) hides the box constraint inside the term M∣γi∣M|\gamma_i|M∣γi​∣ and the penalty inside [ ⋅ ]+[\,\cdot\,]_+[⋅]+​, and the reverse Huber penalty is piecewise, so even the weak-duality half has to handle both pieces of ψ1\psi_1ψ1​ and the junction ∣b∣=λ0/λ2|b|=\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}∣b∣=λ0​/λ2​​. The attainment half is where the work lies: it needs the optimality conditions of a nonsmooth convex problem over a box, at coordinates where βi∗=0\beta^*_i=0βi∗​=0 (where ψ\psiψ is not differentiable), where ∣βi∗∣=M|\beta^*_i|=M∣βi∗​∣=M (where the box is active), and where both may interact with the regime boundary λ0/λ2=M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}=Mλ0​/λ2​​=M. The natural first idea, to read (23) off the Lagrangian derivation in the paper, does not yield a proof: that derivation assumes a dual optimum (α∗,η∗)(\alpha^*,\eta^*)(α∗,η∗) exists and relates it to β∗\beta^*β∗ by complementary slackness, whereas the theorem asserts an identity for the explicit (α∗,γ∗)(\alpha^*,\gamma^*)(α∗,γ∗) built from β∗\beta^*β∗ alone.

Formalization scope

Data are X : Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ, y : Fin n → ℝ and reals lam0 lam2 M with 0 < lam0, 0 < lam2, 0 < M as hypotheses; [p][p][p] is Fin p. Norms and inner products are explicit sums: αTXi=∑rαrXri\alpha^TX_i=\sum_r\alpha_rX_{ri}αTXi​=∑r​αr​Xri​, ∥α∥22=∑rαr2\|\alpha\|_2^2=\sum_r\alpha_r^2∥α∥22​=∑r​αr2​, ∥μ∥1=∑i∣μi∣\|\mu\|_1=\sum_i|\mu_i|∥μ∥1​=∑i​∣μi​∣, [a]+=max⁡{a,0}[a]_+=\max\{a,0\}[a]+​=max{a,0}, and ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty\le M∥β∥∞​≤M is ∣βi∣≤M|\beta_i|\le M∣βi​∣≤M for every iii. The regime split is written λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M versus M<λ0/λ2M<\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}M<λ0​/λ2​​. sign is Real.sign, with sign(0)=0\mathrm{sign}(0)=0sign(0)=0; where it is evaluated in (23) the argument is nonzero at an optimum. The optimal solution β∗\beta^*β∗ is a hypothesis (feasible and minimizing FFF over the box); its existence is not part of the statements. The coordinate milestones (45) and (47) are stated for a scalar aaa standing for αTXi\alpha^TX_iαTXi​ and a multiplier η≥0\eta\ge0η≥0. No normalization of XXX or yyy is assumed: the unit-norm convention that opens Section 3 is not used by Theorem 2. The paper writes no O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) in these results, so no constants are instantiated.

"A dual is given by" is formalized as weak duality over all dual-feasible points together with equality at the explicit dual variables. Weak duality alone would not be Theorem 2, and neither would the equality alone; the goal requires both in both regimes. Uniqueness of the dual optimum is not claimed.

A complete development needs elementary convex analysis of the scalar penalty ψ1\psi_1ψ1​ (its conjugate and subdifferential), first-order optimality conditions for a convex function over a box in Rp\mathbb R^pRp, and finite-sum bookkeeping. The scalar facts about the reverse Huber penalty are reusable in the companion missions on the reduced relaxation and on dual-bound quality. Contributions to any milestone, or a direct proof of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, A. Saab, Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization, arXiv:2004.06152v2 (2021); Mathematical Programming (2022). https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.06152v2
  • S. Boyd, L. Vandenberghe, Convex Optimization, Cambridge University Press, 2004. https://web.stanford.edu/~boyd/cvxbook/
  • A. B. Owen, A robust hybrid of lasso and ridge regression, Contemporary Mathematics 443, 59–72, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1090/conm/443/08555
  • D. Bertsimas, A. King, R. Mazumder, Best subset selection via a modern optimization lens, Annals of Statistics 44(2), 813–852, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1214/15-AOS1388
  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, Fast best subset selection: coordinate descent and local combinatorial optimization algorithms, Operations Research 68(5), 1517–1537, 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1803.01454
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimal TransportProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On a Problem of Optimal Transport Under Marginal Martingale Constraints 2: The Shadow of γ1 + γ2 in ν Is the Shadow of γ1 Plus the Shadow of γ2 in What RemainsResearch Paper

Motivation

The martingale optimal transport problem asks for a coupling of two probability measures μ,ν\mu,\nuμ,ν on R\mathbb RR that is the law of a one-step martingale and minimizes an expected cost. It arises in robust finance, where the marginals are the risk-neutral laws of an asset at two dates implied by option prices, and model-independent price bounds for exotic options are the extreme values of the problem (Beiglböck, Henry-Labordère, Penkner 2013; Galichon, Henry-Labordère, Touzi 2014).

Beiglböck and Juillet (arXiv:1208.1509v2, Ann. Probab. 44(1), 2016) construct a canonical martingale coupling, the left-curtain coupling, which plays the role that the monotone (quantile) coupling plays in classical transport. Its construction rests on one object, the shadow of a measure in another, and on one structural property of it: shadows are associative. This mission formalizes that property, Theorem 4.8 of the paper, together with the chain of results in §2.3 and §4.1–4.3 on which it rests.

Setting

Let M\mathcal MM be the set of finite Borel measures on R\mathbb RR with finite first moment, of any total mass. For μ,ν∈M\mu,\nu\in\mathcal Mμ,ν∈M:

  • the convex order μ⪯Cν\mu\preceq_C\nuμ⪯C​ν holds if ∫φ dμ≤∫φ dν\int\varphi\,d\mu\le\int\varphi\,d\nu∫φdμ≤∫φdν for every convex φ:R→R\varphi:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Rφ:R→R (this forces equal masses and equal barycentres);
  • the extended convex order μ⪯Eν\mu\preceq_E\nuμ⪯E​ν holds if the same inequality holds for every nonnegative convex φ\varphiφ; it holds both when μ⪯Cν\mu\preceq_C\nuμ⪯C​ν and when μ≤ν\mu\le\nuμ≤ν setwise;
  • the potential function of μ\muμ is uμ(x)=∫∣y−x∣ dμ(y)u_\mu(x)=\int|y-x|\,d\mu(y)uμ​(x)=∫∣y−x∣dμ(y);
  • a sequence (νn)(\nu_n)(νn​) converges weakly in M\mathcal MM to ν\nuν if ∫f dνn→∫f dν\int f\,d\nu_n\to\int f\,d\nu∫fdνn​→∫fdν for every continuous bounded fff and ∫∣x∣ dνn→∫∣x∣ dν\int|x|\,d\nu_n\to\int|x|\,d\nu∫∣x∣dνn​→∫∣x∣dν.

If μ⪯Eν\mu\preceq_E\nuμ⪯E​ν, a shadow of μ\muμ in ν\nuν is a measure η\etaη with (i) η≤ν\eta\le\nuη≤ν, (ii) μ⪯Cη\mu\preceq_C\etaμ⪯C​η, and (iii) η⪯Cη′\eta\preceq_C\eta'η⪯C​η′ for every η′\eta'η′ satisfying (i) and (ii). Lemma 4.6 of the paper shows that it exists and is unique; it is written Sν(μ)S^\nu(\mu)Sν(μ). It is the least spread-out part of ν\nuν into which μ\muμ can be transported by a martingale. An atom is a measure α δx\alpha\,\delta_xαδx​ with α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0.

In the Lean development these objects are InM, ConvexLE, ExtConvexLE, potential, ConvergesInM and the predicate IsShadow ν μ η, in the namespace MartOT.Shadow.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.8 (shadow of a sum), p. 25

For γ1,γ2,ν∈M\gamma_1,\gamma_2,\nu\in\mathcal Mγ1​,γ2​,ν∈M with γ1+γ2⪯Eν\gamma_1+\gamma_2\preceq_E\nuγ1​+γ2​⪯E​ν,

γ2⪯Eν−Sν(γ1)andSν(γ1+γ2)=Sν(γ1)+Sν−Sν(γ1)(γ2).\gamma_2\preceq_E\nu-S^\nu(\gamma_1)\qquad\text{and}\qquad S^\nu(\gamma_1+\gamma_2)=S^\nu(\gamma_1)+S^{\nu-S^\nu(\gamma_1)}(\gamma_2).γ2​⪯E​ν−Sν(γ1​)andSν(γ1​+γ2​)=Sν(γ1​)+Sν−Sν(γ1​)(γ2​).

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Proposition 4.2 (p. 21): for equal masses, μ⪯Cν  ⟺  uμ≤uν\mu\preceq_C\nu\iff u_\mu\le u_\nuμ⪯C​ν⟺uμ​≤uν​; μ≤ν  ⟺  uν−uμ\mu\le\nu\iff u_\nu-u_\muμ≤ν⟺uν​−uμ​ is convex; for fixed mass and mean, convergence in M\mathcal MM is pointwise convergence of potential functions.
  2. Proposition 4.4 (p. 21): μ⪯Eν\mu\preceq_E\nuμ⪯E​ν implies μ⪯Cθ\mu\preceq_C\thetaμ⪯C​θ for some θ≤ν\theta\le\nuθ≤ν.
  3. Lemma 4.6 (p. 23): existence, uniqueness and property (iii′) of the shadow.
  4. Example 4.7 (p. 24): the shadow of an atom is the restriction of ν\nuν between two quantiles.
  5. Lemma 4.11 (p. 27): η−Sη(δ)≤ν−Sν(δ)\eta-S^\eta(\delta)\le\nu-S^\nu(\delta)η−Sη(δ)≤ν−Sν(δ) for an atom δ⪯Eη≤ν\delta\preceq_E\eta\le\nuδ⪯E​η≤ν.
  6. Lemma 4.12 (p. 27): the goal when γ1\gamma_1γ1​ is an atom.
  7. Lemma 4.13 (p. 28): the shadow of finitely many atoms, built one atom at a time.
  8. Lemma 2.9 (p. 15): approximation of γ∈M\gamma\in\mathcal Mγ∈M by a ⪯C\preceq_C⪯C​-increasing sequence of finitely supported measures below it.
  9. Proposition 4.15 (p. 29): shadows pass to limits of ⪯C\preceq_C⪯C​-increasing sequences.
  10. Lemma 4.16 (p. 29): the goal when γ2\gamma_2γ2​ is an atom, with δ⪯ESν(γ+δ)−Sν(γ)\delta\preceq_E S^\nu(\gamma+\delta)-S^\nu(\gamma)δ⪯E​Sν(γ+δ)−Sν(γ).

Significance

Theorem 4.8 is what makes the left-curtain coupling well defined and consistent. That coupling is the martingale plan which, for every xxx, sends μ∣]−∞,x]\mu|_{]-\infty,x]}μ∣]−∞,x]​ onto Sν(μ∣]−∞,x])S^\nu(\mu|_{]-\infty,x]})Sν(μ∣]−∞,x]​) (Theorem 4.18). Associativity says that the parts of ν\nuν assigned to μ∣]−∞,x]\mu|_{]-\infty,x]}μ∣]−∞,x]​ and to μ∣]x,x′]\mu|_{]x,x']}μ∣]x,x′]​ fit together into the part assigned to μ∣]−∞,x′]\mu|_{]-\infty,x']}μ∣]−∞,x′]​, so the family of shadows defines a single coupling. The uniqueness of left-monotone martingale plans and the optimality of the left-curtain coupling for the costs h(y−x)h(y-x)h(y−x) with h′h'h′ strictly convex, both later results of the paper, rest on it.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as is known it has no machine-checked proof. This mission produces a statement of it, and of the supporting results, in terms of measures of arbitrary finite mass with no reference to a chosen shadow function. A complete development would give Lean a theory of the convex order on finite measures through potential functions, which is reusable well beyond martingale transport.

Difficulty

For finitely atomic measures the identity follows by adding one atom at a time (Lemmas 4.12, 4.13, 4.16), but even the single-atom step needs a monotonicity property of shadows of atoms in varying targets (Lemma 4.11), and that property comes from their explicit description through quantile functions. The general case cannot be obtained by a direct manipulation of the minimality property (iii): minimality of Sν(γ1)S^\nu(\gamma_1)Sν(γ1​) and of Sν−Sν(γ1)(γ2)S^{\nu-S^\nu(\gamma_1)}(\gamma_2)Sν−Sν(γ1​)(γ2​) separately says nothing obvious about minimality of their sum among measures dominating γ1+γ2\gamma_1+\gamma_2γ1​+γ2​, because a competitor for the sum need not split into competitors for the summands. The paper passes to the limit along convex-order approximations, which requires a continuity property of the shadow (Proposition 4.15) in the topology of M\mathcal MM.

Formalization scope

  • Measures are MeasureTheory.Measure ℝ with membership in M\mathcal MM stated explicitly (InM: finite measure, identity integrable). Masses are arbitrary; nothing is normalized to probability measures.
  • Integrals of convex test functions are taken in EReal through the published ModelRiskOT.Duality.extIntegral (positive minus negative part), never as Bochner integrals, so a non-integrable test function cannot produce a junk value. The extended convex order uses lower Lebesgue integrals of nonnegative functions.
  • Shadows are the predicate IsShadow ν μ η, never a function built by choice. Every statement about Sν(⋅)S^\nu(\cdot)Sν(⋅) quantifies over all shadows, which with existence and uniqueness (Lemma 4.6, a milestone) is the paper's statement. Uniqueness is part of the conclusion of Lemma 4.6 and is not assumed elsewhere.
  • ν−η\nu-\etaν−η is Mathlib's truncated subtraction of measures. It is used only where η≤ν\eta\le\nuη≤ν is guaranteed by property (i) of a shadow. Lemma 4.16 additionally asserts Sν(γ)≤Sν(γ+δ)S^\nu(\gamma)\le S^\nu(\gamma+\delta)Sν(γ)≤Sν(γ+δ), so that the difference there is a genuine one.
  • Not a trivialization: in the goal, neither η1+η2≤ν\eta_1+\eta_2\le\nuη1​+η2​≤ν nor γ1+γ2⪯Cη1+η2\gamma_1+\gamma_2\preceq_C\eta_1+\eta_2γ1​+γ2​⪯C​η1​+η2​ nor the minimality of η1+η2\eta_1+\eta_2η1​+η2​ is assumed; all three are the content of the conclusion IsShadow ν (γ1 + γ2) (η1 + η2).
  • Added relative to the page: Lemma 4.11 states ν∈M\nu\in\mathcal Mν∈M, which the paper takes from context. Proposition 4.2's third bullet is split into an equivalence for each candidate limit and a uniqueness clause, which together are equivalent to the printed sentence. Lemma 4.10 (continuity of ν↦Sν(δ)\nu\mapsto S^\nu(\delta)ν↦Sν(δ) in the Kantorovich metric) and Proposition 4.17 are not included.
  • Needed infrastructure: potential functions and their second distributional derivatives, quantile functions of finite measures, weak convergence of finite measures with first moments. Contributions to any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Beiglböck, N. Juillet, On a problem of optimal transport under marginal martingale constraints, Ann. Probab. 44(1), 42–106, 2016. arXiv:1208.1509v2, doi:10.1214/14-AOP966
  • M. Beiglböck, P. Henry-Labordère, F. Penkner, Model-independent bounds for option prices — a mass transport approach, Finance Stoch. 17(3), 477–501, 2013. doi:10.1007/s00780-013-0205-8
  • A. Galichon, P. Henry-Labordère, N. Touzi, A stochastic control approach to no-arbitrage bounds given marginals, with an application to lookback options, Ann. Appl. Probab. 24(1), 312–336, 2014. doi:10.1214/13-AAP925
  • V. Strassen, The existence of probability measures with given marginals, Ann. Math. Statist. 36, 423–439, 1965. doi:10.1214/aoms/1177700153
17 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Product Framing and Pricing 3: Under MNL Pricing, Optimal Framing Fills Pages in Descending Quality Order with One Price per PageResearch Paper

Motivation

Online retailers show their catalogue on a sequence of pages, and most visitors never reach the last one. Which products appear on the first page, and at what prices, therefore decides what a typical consumer can buy at all. Gallego, Li, Truong and Wang (Operations Research, 2020) model this as the product framing problem: the consideration set of a consumer is the set of products on the pages that consumer is willing to view, and the number of pages viewed is random. Their Section 7 adds prices to the problem and asks how a retailer should frame and price jointly when consumers choose by the multinomial logit (MNL) model.

The question connects two literatures. In assortment pricing under MNL with a common price sensitivity, the optimal prices of all offered products are known to be equal (Anderson, de Palma and Thisse 1992; Gallego and Stefanescu, as cited on p. 16 of the paper), and the nested-logit extension of Gallego and Wang (Operations Research, 2014) keeps an adjusted markup constant across nests. In search and ranking models, the order in which products are shown changes which ones are bought. The paper's structural results say what survives of the equal-price rule once consideration sets are nested by page, and which products belong on the early pages.

Setting

There are nnn products, i∈[n]={1,…,n}i \in [n] = \{1,\dots,n\}i∈[n]={1,…,n}, and mmm pages, each holding at most ppp products. A framing places each product on one page x(i)∈[m]x(i)\in[m]x(i)∈[m] or leaves it undisplayed. A consumer views the first XXX pages, where X∈[m]X\in[m]X∈[m] is random with law λ(x)=P[X=x]\lambda(x)=\mathbf P[X=x]λ(x)=P[X=x], independent of the framing. A consumer who views xxx pages considers S(x)S(x)S(x), the products on pages 1,…,x1,\dots,x1,…,x, so S(1)⊆S(2)⊆⋯⊆S(m)S(1)\subseteq S(2)\subseteq\cdots\subseteq S(m)S(1)⊆S(2)⊆⋯⊆S(m).

Product iii has a quality ai∈Ra_i\in\mathbb Rai​∈R and a price ri∈Rr_i\in\mathbb Rri​∈R, and the price sensitivity is β>0\beta>0β>0. The mean utility of product iii is ui=ai−βriu_i=a_i-\beta r_iui​=ai​−βri​, and the outside option has utility u0=0u_0=0u0​=0. Under the MNL model a consumer with consideration set SSS buys i∈Si\in Si∈S with probability

P(i,S)=eui1+∑k∈Seuk,P(i,S)=\frac{e^{u_i}}{1+\sum_{k\in S}e^{u_k}},P(i,S)=1+∑k∈S​euk​eui​​,

and P(i,S)=0P(i,S)=0P(i,S)=0 for i∉Si\notin Si∈/S. The expected revenue from that consumer is R(r∣S)=∑i∈SriP(i,S)R(r\mid S)=\sum_{i\in S}r_iP(i,S)R(r∣S)=∑i∈S​ri​P(i,S), and the total expected revenue of a framing and a price vector is

E[R(r∣S(X))]=∑x=1mλ(x) R(r∣S(x)).\mathbf E\big[R(r\mid S(X))\big]=\sum_{x=1}^m\lambda(x)\,R\big(r\mid S(x)\big).E[R(r∣S(X))]=x=1∑m​λ(x)R(r∣S(x)).

For a fixed framing, R(a)R(a)R(a) denotes the optimal value of this quantity over all price vectors, as a function of the quality vector aaa.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6 (p. 17)

The goal is the existence of an optimal joint solution with the paper's structure: there are a feasible framing and prices r∈Rnr\in\mathbb R^nr∈Rn such that no feasible framing with any prices earns more, and

∣S(x)∣=min⁡(n,  x p)for all x∈[m],ak≤ai  whenever i is displayed and k is undisplayed or on a later page.|S(x)|=\min(n,\;x\,p)\quad\text{for all }x\in[m],\qquad a_k\le a_i\ \text{ whenever } i \text{ is displayed and } k \text{ is undisplayed or on a later page.}∣S(x)∣=min(n,xp)for all x∈[m],ak​≤ai​  whenever i is displayed and k is undisplayed or on a later page.

Pages are filled in order until all products are displayed, and the products appear in descending order of quality.

Milestones

  1. (15), p. 43. The partial derivative of the total expected revenue in the price of a displayed product:
∂ E[R(r∣S(X))]∂ri=β∑l=x(i)mλ(l)P(i,S(l)){1β+R(r∣S(l))−ri}.\frac{\partial\,\mathbf E[R(r\mid S(X))]}{\partial r_i}=\beta\sum_{l=x(i)}^m\lambda(l)P\big(i,S(l)\big)\Big\{\tfrac1\beta+R\big(r\mid S(l)\big)-r_i\Big\}.∂ri​∂E[R(r∣S(X))]​=βl=x(i)∑m​λ(l)P(i,S(l)){β1​+R(r∣S(l))−ri​}.
  1. (17), p. 43. At every optimal price vector, each displayed price is 1/β1/\beta1/β plus a weighted average of the revenues R(r∣S(l))R(r\mid S(l))R(r∣S(l)), l≥x(i)l\ge x(i)l≥x(i).
  2. Theorem 5, p. 16. For a fixed framing, every optimal price vector is constant on each page, ri=θx(i)r_i=\theta_{x(i)}ri​=θx(i)​, with θ1≤θ2≤⋯≤θm\theta_1\le\theta_2\le\cdots\le\theta_mθ1​≤θ2​≤⋯≤θm​.
  3. (19), p. 44. The optimal value R(a)R(a)R(a) is nondecreasing in the quality of any displayed product.

Significance

Theorem 5 reduces the pricing problem of a fixed framing from nnn prices to mmm page prices and says that later pages carry higher prices; this is the page-level analogue of the constant-markup property of MNL pricing, and it runs opposite to the ordering found in oligopoly search models (Arbatskaya 2007). Theorem 6 removes the framing decision almost entirely: a joint optimum is obtained by sorting the products by quality and filling pages in that order, leaving only page prices to choose. The paper's approximation algorithm for joint pricing and framing (Theorem 7, NEST-P, with guarantee 6/π26/\pi^26/π2) starts from this structure.

None of these statements has a machine-checked proof. A complete development would give the first formal treatment of MNL price optimization with nested consideration sets, including the existence of optimal prices, which the paper takes for granted. The paper's argument for the monotonicity θ1≤⋯≤θm\theta_1\le\cdots\le\theta_mθ1​≤⋯≤θm​ and its envelope-theorem step (19) are informal; a formal proof has to supply both.

Difficulty

The expected revenue is not concave in the prices, even with two products on two pages (Example 1, p. 17), so the first-order condition alone does not identify the optimum, and existence of an optimal price vector has to be argued from the behaviour of the revenue as prices tend to ±∞\pm\infty±∞. The within-page equality of prices follows from the first-order condition, but the ordering of page prices needs a global comparison of revenues across consideration sets. In Theorem 6, the obvious exchange argument (swap a higher-quality product forward) does not obviously keep revenue from decreasing when the swapped products have different prices; the paper splits into two cases, and in one of them the improvement comes from continuously moving qualities, which requires control of the optimal value as a function of aaa rather than of a fixed price vector.

Formalization scope

Products are Fin n, pages are the natural numbers 1,…,m1,\dots,m1,…,m with m≥1m\ge1m≥1, and capacities satisfy p≥1p\ge1p≥1. A framing is f : Fin n → ℕ with page f i ∈ [m] for displayed products and f i = 0 for undisplayed ones (the paper's x(i)=m+1x(i)=m+1x(i)=m+1); feasibility means at most ppp products per page. The law of XXX is a nonnegative function on [m][m][m] summing to one. Prices are finite reals: the paper's priced-out products (ri=+∞r_i=+\inftyri​=+∞) coincide with undisplayed ones, which the framing already allows. "Descending order" and "increases" are read weakly.

Theorem 5 and (17) are stated for every maximizing price vector and only for products on pages that some consumer reaches (Λ(x)=P[X≥x]>0\Lambda(x)=\mathbf P[X\ge x]>0Λ(x)=P[X≥x]>0), a restriction the paper never discusses: a product on a page no consumer reaches can carry any price at an optimum. They do not assert that a maximizer exists. Theorem 6 is read existentially ("some optimal solution has this structure"); the universal reading is false when some λ(x)=0\lambda(x)=0λ(x)=0, because exchanging products between pages xxx and x+1x+1x+1 then changes no revenue. (19) is formalized as its stated consequence, the monotonicity of the optimal value R(a)=sup⁡rE[R(r∣S(X))]R(a)=\sup_r\mathbf E[R(r\mid S(X))]R(a)=supr​E[R(r∣S(X))], together with the boundedness of the revenues; the envelope identity itself would need a differentiable selection of optimal prices that the paper does not establish.

A trivializing formalization of the goal would take the optimum over framings that are already sorted, over a single fixed framing, or over prices fixed in advance; the goal's optimality clause ranges over all feasible framings and all real price vectors. The development needs elementary calculus of the MNL revenue (HasDerivAt, Real.exp), finite sums over pages, and a compactness or limiting argument for the existence of optimal prices. Pages are those of the authors' accepted manuscript, which differ from the journal typesetting. Proofs of any milestone, and lemmas on MNL pricing reusable beyond this paper (boundedness of R(r∣S)R(r\mid S)R(r∣S), existence of optimal MNL prices, the constant-price property for a single assortment), are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Gallego, A. Li, V.-A. Truong, X. Wang, Approximation Algorithms for Product Framing and Pricing, Operations Research 68(1), 2020. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2019.1875
  • S. P. Anderson, A. de Palma, J.-F. Thisse, Discrete Choice Theory of Product Differentiation, MIT Press, 1992 (book; cited by the paper for the equal-price property of MNL pricing).
  • G. Gallego, R. Wang, Multiproduct Price Optimization and Competition under the Nested Logit Model with Product-Differentiated Price Sensitivities, Operations Research 62(2), 2014. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2013.1249
  • M. Arbatskaya, Ordered Search, The RAND Journal of Economics 38(1), 2007. http://www.jstor.org/stable/25046295
9 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 20 of 31Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me